1 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
© 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/13, 07 13 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Contents
The quickest way to find special topics is to
consult the index, refer to page 268.
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
12 Dashboard
20 iDrive
27 Voice activation system
Controls
32 Opening and closing
49 Adjustments
58 Transporting children safely
61 Driving
75 Controls overview
88 Technology for driving comfort and
safety
100 Lamps
106 Climate
111 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
124 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
132 Navigation system
134 Destination entry
143 Destination guidance
151 What to do if …
Entertainment
154 On/off and tone
157 Radio
161 Satellite radio
166 CD/DVD player
172 Music collection
177 External devices
Communications
188 Telephone
201 Office
210 Contacts
212 ConnectedDrive
Mobility
220 Refueling
223 Wheels and tires
232 Engine compartment
237 Maintenance
239 Care
243 Replacing components
250 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
258 Technical data
260 Short commands for the voice activation
system
268 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
4
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.
Updates after press date
Updates after press date for the Owner's Man-
uals, when necessary, are issued as appendices
to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
< Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
5
Notes
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all series-specific equipment, country-specific
equipment, and optional equipment that is
offered in the series. For this reason, this
Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates
some equipment that may not be available in
your vehicle, for example due to the special
options or national-market version selected.
This also applies to safety related functions and
systems.
If equipment and models are not described in
this Owner's Manual, please consult the
accompanying Supplementary Owner's
Handbooks.
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
Updates after press date
Updates after press date for the Owner's Man-
uals, when necessary, are issued as appendices
to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the
vehicle.
Your own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require-
ments applying in the country of first delivery –
homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated
in a different country it might be necessary to
adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper-
ating conditions and permit requirements. If
your vehicle does not comply with the homolo-
gation requirements in a certain country you
cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle
there.
Further information can be obtained from your
service center.
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle per-
formed only by your BMW center or at a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. If this work is not carried out properly,
there is a danger of subsequent damage and
related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
6
Notes
Installation and operation of accessories not
approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any
certified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following
warranties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and registration requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and registration requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita-
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance
measures:
> BMW Maintenance system
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
7
Notes
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not
covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
A variety of electronic components in your vehi-
cle include data storage devices, which store
technical information on the condition of your
vehicle, events and errors, either temporarily or
permanently. In general, this technical informa-
tion documents the condition of a component, a
module, a system or the surroundings:
> Operating conditions of system compo-
nents, e.g., fill levels.
> Status messages regarding the vehicle and
of its individual components, such as wheel
rpm/vehicle speed, response delay, lateral
acceleration.
> Malfunctions and defects in the major sys-
tem components, such as the lights and
brakes.
> Responses of the vehicle in special driving
situations, such as the deployment of an
airbag, the utilization of stability control
systems.
> Environmental conditions, such as
temperature.
These data are exclusively of a technical nature
and are used for the detection and correction of
errors, as well as the optimization of vehicle
functions. Motion profiles of traveled routes can
not be deduced from these data. If services are
required, such as repair services, service pro-
cesses, warranty claims and quality assurance,
then this technical information can be read out
by employees of service departments, includ-
ing the manufacturer, from the event and error
data storage devices by using special diagnos-
tic equipment. There, if necessary, you will
receive further information. After remedying an
error, the information in the error memory is
deleted or progressively overwritten.
When using the vehicle, situations are conceiv-
able in which this technical data, in conjunction
with other information, such as accident
reports, vehicle damage, witness statements,
etc. - possibly with the assistance of an expert -
could be traced to particular individuals.
Additional functions that are agreed upon
contractually with the customer, such as vehi-
cle tracking in case of emergency, permit the
transmission of certain vehicle data from the
vehicle.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your center, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
8
Notes
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-
phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
9
Notes
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
12
At a glance Dashboard
Dashboard
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
13
Dashboard
At a glance
1 Convertible: opening and closing
windows jointly 42
2 Convertible: opening and closing
rear windows 42
3 Opening and closing front
windows 42
4 Exterior mirrors folding in and out 55
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor 55
6
Parking lamps 100
Low beams 101
Automatic headlamp control 100
Adaptive Light Control 101
High-beam Assistant 102
7
Fog lamps 103
8
Turn signals 71
High beams, headlamp
flasher 102
High-beam Assistant 102
Roadside parking lamps 102
Computer 77
Settings and information about the
vehicle 79
9 Instrument cluster 14
10
Windshield wipers 71
Rain sensor 72
11 Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 61
12 Ignition lock 61
13 Buttons on the steering wheel
Telephone:
Accepting and ending a call; dial-
ing the selected phone number;
redialing if no phone number is
selected
Convertible: microphone on
steering column
Volume
Activating/deactivating the voice
activation system 27
Convertible: microphone on
steering column
Changing the radio station
Interrupting a traffic bulletin
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Next entertainment source
Recirculated air mode 108
14
Steering wheel heating 57
15 Horn, entire surface
16 Adjusting the steering wheel 57
17
Cruise control 73
18 Releasing the hood 233
19 Opening the trunk lid 37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
14
At a glance Dashboard
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
135i: with fuel gauge
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 15
4 Tachometer 76
5 Fuel gauge 76
135i: engine oil temperature 76
6 Display for
> Clock 75
> Outside temperature 75
> Indicator and warning lamps 84
7 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission 64
> Gear indicator of 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch 66
> Computer 77
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 80
> Odometer and trip odometer 75
> High-beam Assistant 102
> Checking the oil level 233
> Settings and information 79
8 Resetting the trip odometer 75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
15
Dashboard
At a glance
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
You can call up more information on the Control
Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and
on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to
page 84.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
High beams/headlamp flasher 102
Fog lamps 103
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-
sive forces in order to maintain driving
stability 90
Canada: parking brake applied 63
Parking brake applied 63
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on emissions 238
Engine malfunction with adverse
effect on emissions 238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
16
At a glance Dashboard
Around the center console: controls and displays
1 Control Display 20
2 Driving stability control systems
> Dynamic Stability Control DSC 89
> Dynamic Traction Control DTC 90
3 Hazard warning flashers
4 Central locking system 37
5 Automatic climate control
Air distribution to the
windshield 107
Air distribution to the upper body
area 107
Air distribution to the footwell 107
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 107
Air conditioning 109
Automatic recirculated air control
AUC and recirculated air
mode 108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
17
Dashboard
At a glance
6 CD/DVD drive 166
7 Programmable memory keys 25
8 Changing
> Radio station 157
> Track 166
9 Controller 20
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
10 Buttons on the controller 21
Selecting menus directly
11 Switching entertainment audio sources on/
off and adjusting volume 154
12 Ejecting a CD/DVD 166
Maximum cooling 107
ALL program 108
Air volume 108
Defrosting windows 109
Rear window defroster 109
Seat heating 54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
18
At a glance Dashboard
Around the roofliner
Coupe
1 Microphone for voice activation system and
for telephone in hands-free mode
2
SOS: sending an Emergency
Request 250
3
Reading lamps 105
4
Glass roof, electric 43
5
Interior lamps 104
6
Passenger airbag status lamp 98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
20
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
The concept
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num-
ber of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions permit; otherwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users by being distracted.<
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Move in four directions, arrows 3
> Turn, arrow 4
> Push, arrow 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
21
iDrive
At a glance
Control Display
Notes
> Follow care instructions when cleaning the
Control Display.
> Do not store items in the region in front of
the Control Display; doing so may damage
the Control Display.
Switching off
1. Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller to switch on.
Buttons on the controller
Operating principle
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
refer to page 61, the following message is
displayed on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Symbol Function
MENU Open the main menu
RADIO Open the Radio menu
MEDIA Open the CD/Multimedia menu
NAV Start navigation in map view
TEL Open the Telephone menu
BACK Show previous panel
OPTION Open the Options menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
22
At a glance iDrive
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that
should be selected are depicted in quotation
marks, e.g. "Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g. "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
> Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ-
ous panel is displayed.
Pressing the BACK button reopens the pre-
vious panel. This does not close the current
panel.
> Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened and laid over it.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi-
cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When you open a menu, generally the panel last
selected in this menu is displayed. To display
the first panel of the menu:
> Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
> Press the menu's button twice on the
controller.
Open the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Another possibility: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
Options menu
The "Options" menu is composed of different
areas:
> Screen settings, e.g. "Split screen".
The region remains unchanged.
> Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g. "Radio".
> Other control options for the selected
menu, e.g. "Store station".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
23
iDrive
At a glance
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
Activating/deactivating functions
Some menu items are preceded by a check box.
It indicates whether the function is activated or
deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates
or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status box
The status box at the top right displays the
following information:
> Time
> Current entertainment source
> Sound output ON/OFF
> Mobile phone network with strongest
reception
> Telephone status
> Traffic reports reception
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
24
At a glance iDrive
Status box symbols
The symbols are divided into separate groups.
Radio symbols
Telephone symbols
Entertainment symbols
Other
With the Professional
navigation system:
Split screen
General information
Additional information, e.g. from the computer,
can be displayed on the right side of the split
screen.
This information remains visible on the split
screen even when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting display
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Symbol Meaning
Traffic bulletins switched on
HD radio switched on
Satellite radio switched on
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call
Missed call
Reception strength of mobile
phone network
Symbol flashing: network search
No mobile phone network available
Bluetooth switched on
Roaming active
Receiving text message, email
Checking SIM card
SIM card blocked
SIM card missing
Entering PIN
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player
Music collection
Gracenote® database
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Symbol Meaning
Voice instructions are switched off
Querying current vehicle position
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
25
iDrive
At a glance
Programmable memory keys
General information
iDrive functions can be stored on the program-
mable memory keys and called up directly, e.g.
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and entry points into the menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Storing functions
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. ... Press the desired button
for longer than two seconds.
Executing a function
... Press the button.
The function is executed immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying memory key assignments
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
> Displaying brief information: press the
button.
> Displaying detailed information: press and
hold the button.
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm entry.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Switching between uppercase and
lowercase letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering uppercase letters and lower-
case letters:
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete
one letter or number
Press the controller for an
extended period: delete all
letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
Symbol Function
Move the controller toward
the front: to switch from
uppercase letters to lower-
case letters
Move the controller toward
the front: to switch from low-
ercase letters to uppercase
letters
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
26
At a glance iDrive
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
> During entry, only letters for which there are
data are offered.
> Destination search: town/city names can be
entered with the spelling used in any of the
languages available on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
27
Voice activation system
At a glance
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
The concept
> The voice activation system can be used
to control most functions by spoken
commands.
> Functions that can only used when the vehi-
cle is stopped cannot be operated using the
voice activation system.
> The system includes a special microphone
on the driver's side.
> In the Owner's Manual, {...} indicates com-
mands for the voice activation system.
> In the Owner's Manual, {{...}} indicates the
answers from the voice activation system.
Prerequisite
On the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
to permit identification of the commands to be
spoken.
Setting the language, refer to page 87.
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the acoustic signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol on the Control Display and an
acoustic signal notify you that the voice activa-
tion system is activated.
If no additional commands are possible,
continue by operating the function via iDrive.
Finishing voice input
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands.
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently selected on the Control
Display.
There are short commands for functions of the
main menu.
Some list entries such as phone book entries
can also be selected using the voice activation
system. Make sure to say list entries the same
way as they appear in the respective list.
{Cancel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
28
At a glance Voice activation system
Having the possible commands read
aloud
To have the available commands read aloud:
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis-
played, the commands relating to settings are
read aloud.
Performing functions using short
commands
Functions from the main menu can be per-
formed directly by means of short commands,
essentially regardless of which menu item is
selected, e.g. {Vehicle status}.
List of short command of the voice activation
system, refer to page 260.
Help dialog for voice activation system
Accessing help:
Other commands for the help dialog:
> {Help with examples}: information about
the current control options and the most
important commands relating to them are
read aloud.
> {Help with voice activation}: information
about the principle operation of the voice
activation system is read aloud.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Via short commands
The CD playback can also be started via a short
command.
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Voice commands}
{Help}
3. {C D and multimedia}
The system plays the last media played.
4. {C D}
5. {C D drive}
The CD is played.
6. Press the button on the steering
wheel again in order to select the
particular track.
7. {Track …} e.g. CD track 4.
3. {C D drive Track …} e.g. CD track 4.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
29
Voice activation system
At a glance
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system uses the stan-
dard dialog or a short version.
In the short version of the voice dialog, the
responses from the system are given in abbre-
viated form.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting.
Adjusting volume
Turn the volume knob during the spoken
instruction to select the desired volume.
> The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini-
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 250,
in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha-
sis and speed.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name:
{Station …} e.g. National Public Radio
> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof/pan-
oramic glass roof closed to prevent interfer-
ence from ambient noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
32
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort
Access, the remote control contains a replace-
able battery, refer to page 41.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-
sonal Profile, next column.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 237.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, refer to page 36
> Convertible: glove compartment, refer to
page 115
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote con-
trols with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-
file ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the
settings stored for it are called up and imple-
mented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi-
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
33
Opening and closing
Controls
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in
use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Programming the Programmable memory
keys, refer to page 25
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 34
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 37
> Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi-
tion, refer to page 54
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 71
> Settings for the display on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 82
> Date format, refer to page 84
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 87
> Language of the Control Display, refer to
page 87
> Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 80
> Show visual warning for Park Distance
Control PDC, refer to page 88
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 101
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 101
> Daytime running lights, refer to
page 101
> High-beam Assistant, refer to page 102
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac-
tivating AUTO program, air conditioning
and automatic recirculated air control,
setting temperature, air volume and
distribution, refer to page 107 ff
> Entertainment:
> Tone control, refer to page 155
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 156
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Trunk lid
> Fuel filler flap
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Using the door lock
> In cars with Comfort Access, via the handles
on the driver's door or the front passenger
door
At the same time as locking and unlocking via
the remote control:
> Welcome lights, the interior light, and the
courtesy lighting are switched on or off.
> Alarm system, refer to page 38, is armed or
disarmed.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 37.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
34
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Convertible: to operate the convertible
top with the remote control, the doors and
trunk lid must be closed and the trunk partition
must be folded down and engaged on both
sides. Refer also to page 46.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lighting of the
doors, and the welcome lamps come on.
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Pressing the button once unlocks
the driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
5. Press the controller.
Coupe: convenient opening
Press and hold the button.
The windows and the glass roof are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to open
the convertible top and windows.
Hold the button down.
The windows and the convertible top are
opened provided that the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the
windows move up.
Watch during the opening process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Convertible: convenient closing
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to
close the convertible top and windows.
Press and hold the button.
The convertible top and the windows are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
35
Opening and closing
Controls
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the trunk lid
Press the button for about 1 second and
then release it.
The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless
of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The trunk lid swings backward and up
when opened. Make sure that adequate
clearance is available before opening.
To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do
not place the remote control in the trunk.
A previously locked trunk lid is locked again
after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the trunk
lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the controller.
Calling up the driver's seat position
The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select whether or not the seat is reset
to that position automatically.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted when you
touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the
memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Coupe: in vehicles without Comfort Access,
only the driver's door can be locked and
unlocked with the integrated key via the door
lock.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 32. The remote control for Comfort
Access contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 41.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
36
Controls Opening and closing
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is
unlocked, refer to page 34.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Coupe:Without Comfort Access the alarm
system is triggered if unlocking occurs via the
door lock.
To switch off the alarm:
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 34, or insert the remote control all
the way into the ignition lock.<
Further details of the alarm system, refer to
page 38.
Coupe
Without Comfort Access, only the driver's
door is locked via the door lock.<
To lock both doors, the fuel filler flap and the
trunk lid together:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle
using the button for the central locking
system in the interior, refer to page 37.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front
passenger door, refer to page 37.
3. Lock the vehicle.
> Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
> press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-
tions in the door lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
37
Opening and closing
Controls
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. Depending on its embodiment, the fuel
filler flap can be unlocked as needed.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks after a
short time if no door has been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Trunk lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
trunk lid.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it
has been locked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
38
Controls Opening and closing
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button
on the remote control for a longer period. The
trunk lid opens slightly and can be swung
upward.
Locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the trunk lid
2 Unlocking the trunk lid
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked
using the central locking system.
If you give the remote control without the inte-
grated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened. This is an advantage when valet park-
ing, for example. Locking the glove compart-
ment, refer to page 115.
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the trunk. The trunk lid is
unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
trunk lid make it easier to pull down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.<
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is
opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: interior
motion sensor, refer to page 39
> When the car's inclination changes, e.g.
if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal
the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away:
tilt alarm sensor, refer to page 39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
39
Opening and closing
Controls
> When there has been an interruption of
power supply from the battery
Depending on the market-specific version, the
alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry
attempts by:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
Arming and disarming
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock with armed alarm system
In some national-market versions, unlocking via
the door lock triggers the alarm.
To switch off this alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control or switch on the ignition.
Trunk lid with the alarm system armed
The trunk lid can be opened via the remote
control even when the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid is locked and monitored again as
soon as it is closed.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 34, or
> insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp on inside mirror
> The indicator lamp flashes continuously:
The system is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood, or trunk lid are not prop-
erly closed, the remaining components are
secured.
Then the indicator lamp flashes continu-
ously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior
motion sensor and tilt sensor are not active.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5minutes:
The vehicle has been tampered with.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, for example to attempts to steal
a wheel or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe
For proper function, the windows and glass
sunroof must be closed.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. This way, the anti-
theft alarm system including the interior motion
sensor are armed, even if the convertible top is
open. Falling objects, e.g. tree leaves, may trig-
ger a false alarm, refer to Avoiding false alarms.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
40
Controls Opening and closing
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt sensor and interior motion sensor can
be deactivated together, for example in the
following situations:
> In car washes
> In stacking garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When leaving animals in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Once the vehicle is locked, press the
button on the remote control again
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
begins flashing again. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort Access
The concept
It is possible to access the vehicle without actu-
ating the remote control. It is sufficient to have
the remote control with you, for example in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically
detects the remote control in the vicinity or in
the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Convenient closing
> Unlocking the trunk lid separately
> Engine starting
Functional requirement
> There are no external sources of interfer-
ence in the vicinity.
> The remote control must be outside the
vehicle to lock it.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> It is only possible to start the engine if the
remote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The above functions can be controlled by
pressing the remote control buttons or by using
Comfort Access.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows, the glass roof or the
convertible top, the system is checking whether
a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please
repeat the opening or closing procedure, if
necessary.<
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closing
Keep pressing the surface, arrow 2, with your
finger.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
41
Opening and closing
Controls
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
you can open and close the windows and the
convertible top when a remote control is
located inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle after the trunk lid is closed, the
lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers
flash and a signal sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches on
radio readiness.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other-
wise, the engine will start immediately.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 63.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Malfunctions
Local radio waves can interfere with the func-
tion of Comfort Access, for example when a
mobile phone is in the immediate vicinity of the
remote control or by when a mobile phone is
being charged in the vehicle.
If this happens, open and close the vehicle via
the buttons on the remote control or using the
integrated key. To start the engine afterward,
insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote
control with you inside the vehicle or have it
checked. If necessary, insert another remote
control into the ignition lock.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 32.
2. Remove the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
42
Controls Opening and closing
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side
facing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Dispose of the old battery at a recycling
center or at your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control out of the ignition
when you leave the car; otherwise, children
could operate the electric windows and possi-
bly injure themselves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press
the switch again to stop the opening
movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Window operation with Comfort Access, also
refer to page 34.
To close the side windows while driving,
either close the rear windows first or all
four windows together; otherwise, the windows
may not close tightly at high speeds.<
Individually
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot
be closed automatically.
Jointly
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
All windows open as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press
the switch again to stop the opening
movement.
> Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the
switch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
43
Opening and closing
Controls
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door has been opened.
Convenient opening and closing
For Convenient opening and closing using the
remote control, refer to page 34. For Conve-
nient closing using Comfort Access, refer to
Locking on page 40.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
power window closes, the closing action is
interrupted and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise, the
pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them
closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the
windows, etc., prevents you from closing the
windows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Coupe: glass roof, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Tilting
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is tilted and the
sliding visor opens slightly.
Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with
the roof in the tilted position, as this would
damage the mechanism.<
Opening, closing
> Push the switch rearward to the resistance
point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
> Push the switch rearward past the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For Convenient opening and closing using the
remote control, refer to page 34. For Conve-
nient closing using Comfort Access, refer to
Locking on page 40.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
44
Controls Opening and closing
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the tilted position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it
there. The roof closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be tilted. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work performed at your BMW center.
Convertible: convertible top
The fully automatic top combines reliable
weather protection with simple and easy-to-
use operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving
pleasure in your Convertible:
> It is recommended that you close the con-
vertible top whenever the vehicle is parked.
The closed convertible top not only pro-
tects the vehicle interior from damage due
to unforeseen bad weather, but also pro-
vides a certain degree of protection against
theft. However, even when the top is
closed, valuables should only be stored in
the locked trunk.
> Do not mount any roof rack systems on the
convertible top.
> If the top is opened while it is wet, e.g. after
driving in the rain, water may drip into the
trunk. If necessary, remove items from the
trunk beforehand to avoid water stains or
soiling.
At temperatures below +147/–106, do
not move the convertible top as this could
result in damage.
Do not keep the convertible top in the convert-
ible top box for longer than one day if it is wet;
otherwise, the moisture may cause damage.
Do not place objects on the convertible top, as
otherwise they may fall off when you operate
the convertible top and cause damage or injury.
Never move the convertible top when the roll-
over protection system is in the activated
position.
Always completely finish the operation of the
convertible top. Driving with the convertible top
incompletely opened or closed can result in
damage or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism during the
opening or closing procedure. Keep children
away from the opening/closing path of the
convertible top.
For safety reasons, only operate the convertible
top while the vehicle is standing.<
While opening and closing, the convert-
ible top pivots upward. When operating
the convertible top in a garage, under a bridge,
etc., ensure that there are at least 6.5 ft/2 m of
headroom; otherwise, the vehicle may be
damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
45
Opening and closing
Controls
Before opening and closing
> Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
> Ensure that the trunk partition is folded
down and engaged on both sides, refer to
page 118; otherwise, it will not be possible
to open the convertible top.
> Ensure that the cargo does not press
against the trunk partition from below.
> Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.
Opening and closing
Convertible top operation with Comfort Access,
also refer to page 34.
As of radio readiness, refer to page 61:
To conserve battery power, if possible
operate the convertible top only while the
engine is running.
Prior to closing the convertible top, check for
and remove all debris from the windshield
frame; otherwise, the closing of the top may be
hampered.<
1 Push button: close the convertible top
2 Push button: open convertible top
3 LEDs
The side windows move down when the
convertible top is opened.<
If it is no longer possible to operate the cover
after it has been actuated several times in
immediate succession or after the cover has
remained in an intermediate position for a
longer period, then the convertible top drive has
overheated.
If possible, close the convertible top and allow
the drive unit to cool for a few minutes.
Operating while driving
You can open or close the convertible top while
driving, as long as the car is not moving faster
than approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
If you accelerate to over 30 mph/50 km/h while
the convertible top is moving, the procedure is
interrupted.
While operating the convertible top, pay
close attention to the surrounding traffic;
otherwise, an accident may happen. Try to
avoid operating the convertible top while
reversing the vehicle since the rear view is very
limited during the convertible top's movement.
Do not operate the convertible top while driving
in windy conditions. Do not drive faster than
30 mph/50 km/h; otherwise, damage to the
vehicle can occur.<
LEDs
> While the convertible top is being operated,
the left LED lights up green. It goes out as
soon as the top is fully opened or closed.
In the following situations, a message appears
on the Control Display or an acoustic signal
sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you
release the button, the opening or closing
action has not yet finished.
> If the right-hand LED lights up red when the
button is pressed, the trunk partition is
raised, the trunk lid is not closed or there is a
malfunction. The convertible top cannot be
moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the button for the convertible top
operation is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction by pushing or
pulling the buttons.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
46
Controls Opening and closing
If the opening or closing procedure is inter-
rupted for an extended period, the convertible
top remains in the raised position for approx.
10 minutes and then slowly moves to a stable
position.
A convertible top which is not completely
open or closed is hazardous.<
If the convertible top is not fully opened or
closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened
and the windows cannot be moved.<
Convenient opening and closing using
the remote control
Refer to page 34.
Closing manually
Only close the convertible top manually if
it is absolutely necessary. Never open it
manually. The convertible top box cover cannot
be locked if there is an electrical defect and
would then open while the vehicle is in motion.
Incorrect handling can result in damage.<
Closing the convertible top manually should be
performed by two people. The rear seats must
not be occupied.
Only move the convertible top and the convert-
ible top box cover when the ignition is switched
off.
Before closing
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Take the screwdriver out of the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 243.
3. If the convertible top box cover is locked,
release the two buttons in the trunk,
arrows 1, using the screwdriver and pull
forcefully all the way out. The convertible
top box cover is unlocked.
After unlocking, do not push the
buttons back into the luggage
compartment trim panel.<
4. When the top is closed manually, it is no
longer possible to open the trunk lid. Take
urgently needed items out of the luggage
compartment and close the trunk lid.
5. Switch off ignition.
Closing
1. Slide the protective cap, arrow 2, forward.
2. Slowly and smoothly open the convertible
top box cover all the way, arrow 3.
3. The locking pins must have engaged com-
pletely. If they are still visible: close the con-
vertible top box cover as far as necessary
until the locking bolts engage audibly, then
slowly open the cover. During this process,
do not close the convertible top box cover
completely.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
47
Opening and closing
Controls
4. Lift out the front part of the convertible top,
arrows 4, on both sides and swing it for-
ward. At the same time keep the convertible
top box cover from closing, e.g. using your
shoulder.
5. Position the rear convertible top frame
upright, arrow 5, and close the convertible
top box cover, arrow 6. Then lower the rear
convertible top frame.
6. Together with another person, press down
the front convertible top frame from the out-
side and on both sides as far as possible.
7. Carefully remove the cover in the center of
the front convertible top frame using a
pointed object.
Take the allen wrench out of the onboard
literature pouch.
8. Attach the handle of the screwdriver to the
allen wrench and insert the wrench into the
opening provided.
9. Turn the allen wrench all the way to the left,
arrow 7, until the front convertible top frame
is locked to the windshield frame. The rear
convertible top frame is automatically
pressed down onto the convertible top box
cover and is sealed tight under tension.
The closing procedure must be fully
completed; otherwise, injury or damage
may occur.<
Please contact your BMW center to have the
cause of the malfunction eliminated.
Wind deflector
With the convertible top open, the wind deflec-
tor keeps air movement in the passenger com-
partment to a minimum, thus providing you with
a more pleasant drive, even at higher speeds.
Installation
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of
the wind deflector until the catch engages,
arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
48
Controls Opening and closing
3. Position both locking pins of one side at the
openings provided for them.
4. Press the wind deflector into the openings,
arrows 3, overcoming the tension in the
springs, and push the free locking pin in the
same direction, arrow 4.
5. Position the free locking pins at the corre-
sponding openings and let the spring
tension lock the wind deflector in place,
arrow 5.
6. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec-
tor, arrow 6.
With the wind deflector installed: do not
recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this
would damage the wind deflector.<
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal-
lation.
Folding
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of
the wind deflector and push the two halves
apart.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
49
Adjustments
Controls
Adjustments
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equip-
ment described may not be available in a partic-
ular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In
conjunction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting
children safely, refer to page 58.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
i.e. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard;
otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front air-
bag deploys.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise,
serious injuries can result if the airbag
deploys.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely
sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only
temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 97.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level.
Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 52.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-
wise, the belt could slide over your hips and
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
50
Controls Adjustments
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and
regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area
taut; otherwise, its restraining effect could be
impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 54.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a
danger in the event of an accident of sliding
under the safety belt, eliminating the protection
normally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 52, and on damaged safety
belts on page 55.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible
personal protection.<
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages
properly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Angle
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
ward or back.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
51
Adjustments
Controls
Electrical adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer
to Head restraints on page 52.
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive
supplementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the
lateral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases
accordingly.
Longitudinal adjustment from outside/
behind
To move the front seats forward or backward
from outside or from one of the rear seats: with
the door open, press the front end 1 or rear
end 2 of the switch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
52
Controls Adjustments
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury in an accident.<
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove a head restraint if no one will be
sitting on the seat in question.
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Rear seats
Coupe: height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Convertible: raising and lowering
Only lower the head restraints if there are
no passengers in the rear. Raise all
lowered head restraints before transporting
passengers in the rear.<
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down, arrow 2.
Removing
Only remove a head restraint if no one will be
sitting on the seat in question.
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
53
Adjustments
Controls
Coupe: folding head restraint down and
up
Only fold down a head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question. Fold up the head
restraints again before transporting passengers
in the rear.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may
contain foldable head restraints.
Folding down:
Press the button, arrow 1.
Folding up:
Pull the head restraint.
Entering the rear seats
Seat with manual longitudinal
adjustment
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory
function for the longitudinal adjustment and
backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.
Previous position
Push the seat backward and swing the backrest
back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost
position, make sure that no one is injured
and that no objects are damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and
backrests so that they are locked in place.
Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to
unexpected movement.<
Seat with electrical longitudinal
adjustment
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory
function for the longitudinal adjustment and
backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the
seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat
automatically stops in its previous position, and
fold the backrest back. If you release the switch
before the previous seat position is reached,
the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make
sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and
backrests so that they are locked in place.
Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to
unexpected movement.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
54
Controls Adjustments
Seat heating
Press the button once per temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx. the next
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar
support are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 61.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
the LED goes out.
Call-up
Do not call up the memory while you are
driving; otherwise, unexpected seat
movement could result in an accident.<
Comfort function
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 61.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted when you
touch a seat adjustment switch or one of
the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the
ignition on or off, refer to page 61.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 49 to ensure the best possible
personal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
55
Adjustments
Controls
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, refer to page 50.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for front seats
The indicator lamps light up and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-
tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also
issued above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h if the front
passenger safety belt has not been fastened, if
there are objects on the front passenger seat or
if the driver or front passenger unfasten their
safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work carried out
only at your BMW center. Otherwise correct
operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of an
accident.<
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor
3 Folding mirrors in and out
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out
By pressing button 3, you can fold the mirrors in
and out at driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h. This can be beneficial in narrow
streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that
were folded in by hand back out into their cor-
rect positions. Mirrors that have been folded in
will fold out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
56
Controls Adjustments
Automatic heating
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Passenger side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Shift into reverse or move the selector lever
into the R position.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-
lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
57
Adjustments
Controls
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there
is a risk of an accident due to unexpected
movement.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated
position.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise, the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Steering wheel heating
Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up when the steer-
ing wheel heating is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
58
Controls Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equip-
ment described may not be available in a partic-
ular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
Children should always sit in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Children in the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to page 97.
Installing child restraint
systems
Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the protective effect may be
diminished. <
Standard child restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
Backrest width
The backrest width of the front passenger
seat must be at its widest possible set-
ting. Do not change the setting after installing
the child seat; otherwise, the child seat's stabil-
ity on the front passenger seat is limited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest
setting, refer to page 51.
2. Install the child seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
59
Transporting children safely
Controls
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system; otherwise, the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Mounts for lower LATCH anchors
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest; otherwise, the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
Coupe: rear seats
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located behind the labeled protective caps.
Convertible: rear seats
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located at the positions indicated by arrows, in
the gap between the seat and the backrest.
Installing LATCH child restraint
systems
1 Installing child restraint system, refer to the
system operating instructions.
2 Make sure that both LATCH anchors are
correctly locked in position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
60
Controls Transporting children safely
Child restraint system with tether strap
Convertible
For Canadian Customers Only.
The following statement is required by Trans-
port Canada.
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child
restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir-
ing the use of a tether strap can be properly
secured in the vehicle.
Coupe
Use the tether anchors to secure child
restraint systems only; otherwise, the
anchors could be damaged.<
For child restraint systems with tether straps
there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Coupe
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise, the strap will not properly secure the child
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint
system
If necessary, fold the head restraints upward
before use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
61
Driving
Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Comfort Access
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only
insert the remote control into the ignition lock
under special circumstances, refer to page 40.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the remote control unless
the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
Manual transmission: if you press the
Start/Stop button and depress the clutch,
the engine starts.
Automatic transmission and Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch: when you
press the Start/Stop button and depress the
brake pedal, the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with Comfort Access, by touching
the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
62
Controls Driving
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch
off the ignition and any unnecessary
electrical consumers in order to preserve the
battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as
displays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in enclosed areas;
otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause loss of consciousness and
death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly
toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle
with the engine running; otherwise, such a
vehicle represents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
place the transmission in neutral or move the
selector lever to position P and forcefully apply
the parking brake to prevent the car from
moving.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 40.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift into neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 40.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 40.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine starts independent of the current
transmission position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
63
Driving
Controls
Switching off the engine
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from starting the engine, for
example.<
When parking, apply the parking brake
forcefully; otherwise, the vehicle could
begin to roll. On steep uphill and downhill
inclines, also secure the vehicle by turning the
wheels toward the curb, for example.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-
tor lever to position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
1. With the car at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
If the transmission is shifted into N when
the engine is switched off, you will be
notified visually and acoustically of this
fact.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
3. Remove remote control from the ignition
lock, refer to page 61. The transmission is
automatically shifted into transmission
position P.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Also follow the instructions on page 63, under
Switching off the engine.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off a signal sounds in addition.
The parking brake is still applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
64
Controls Driving
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 65.
Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
interlock. Removing the remote control from
the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is displayed and, in
manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents inadvertent shifting into the
selector lever positions R and P. To release the
lock, press the button on the front of the selec-
tor lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The transmission locks to prevent the drive
wheels from turning.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
65
Driving
Controls
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con-
sumption is lowest when you are driving in
position D.
Kickdown
Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program
is activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
To deactivate the sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Changing gears using shifting paddles
on steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears
quickly since both hands can remain on the
steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear
plane, manual mode remains active.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
66
Controls Driving
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift
paddle –.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Overriding selector lever lock
If the selector lever will not move out of
position P even though the ignition is switched
on, the brake is depressed, and the button on
the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever
lock can be overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 243, press the
red lever, see arrow, while moving the
selector lever to the desired position.
7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch
The concept
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch is an automated manual trans-
mission with two clutches and secondary gear
sets in which the clutching and shifting is
handled by an electrohydraulic system.
With the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch, the gears are shifted without
an interruption in driving power.
You operate the 7-gear Sport automatic trans-
mission with double clutch using the selector
lever and two shift paddles on the steering
wheel.
It offers you the following functions:
> Either manual or automatic mode: sequen-
tial mode or drive mode
> Automatic downshifting and protection
against incorrect gear selection, even in
sequential mode
> Acceleration assistant, Launch Control,
refer to page 70
> Automatic intermediate throttle application
System limitations
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch has an overheating protection
that protects the clutch from extreme loads.
The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if
the transmission becomes too warm.
Avoid high engine loads and frequent
accelerations from zero. If the transmission is
overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red
and the power flow to the motor is interrupted. It
is only possible to continue driving once the
transmission has cooled down.
Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from
zero and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by
pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting
the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmis-
sion to overheat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
67
Driving
Controls
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
The selector lever position and the engaged
gear are displayed, e.g. M4.
Engaging selector lever positions
> The selector lever can be moved out of
position P only with the engine running:
interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not
be executed: shiftlock.
Shifting into N, D, R
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired
direction, overcoming a resistance point if
necessary. When shifting out of P or into R,
simultaneously press the button 1.
The engaged selector lever position is also
displayed on the selector lever.
When you release the selector lever, it returns
to its center position.
Shifting into P
Press the button P.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
The transmission is shifted into P if, with
the engine running, you open the driver's
door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and
subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal
nor the accelerator. Before leaving the vehicle,
make sure that the automatic transmission
selector lever is in the park position. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move.<
The transmission is shifted into P as soon
as you switch off the engine, unless the
transmission is in N and the remote control is in
the ignition lock, refer to page 61. As soon as
you remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.<
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
After the engine is switched off, the trans-
mission remains in N if you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. You can use
this function at a car wash, for example, refer to
page 240.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
68
Controls Driving
D Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Kickdown
For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as
passing, depress the accelerator past the resis-
tance point. This provides maximum accelera-
tion.
Sport program and manual operation
M/S
Push selector lever toward the left from the
selector lever position D, the Sport program is
activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In the following situations, the 7-gear Sport
automatic transmission with double clutch
does the thinking for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that could cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> At a stop, the transmission is automatically
shifted down to the first gear.
> Shortly before the speed falls below a gear-
dependent minimum speed, the transmis-
sion automatically downshifts without your
intervention.
Quick downshifting: even in sequential mode,
you can skip over several gears in order to
achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so,
depress the accelerator past the resistance
point.
To return to automatic mode, push the selector
lever to the right.
Gear shifting
Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or
the shift paddles. You do not need to lift your
foot off the accelerator when doing so.
Using the selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the
rear.
> To downshift, push it toward the front.
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
You can also shift manually using two shift pad-
dles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles
allow you to shift gears quickly since both
hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode if the selector lever is in
position D.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
69
Driving
Controls
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift
paddle –.
Driving dynamics control
The driving dynamics control permits you, at
the push of a button, to have your BMW react in
an even more sporty fashion when driving:
> Optimal use is made of the engine's speed
range.
> Gear changes occur more quickly.
> The engine reacts more spontaneously to
accelerator pedal movements.
Activating the system
Press the SPORT button.
The LED in the button lights up.
Deactivating the system
> Press the SPORT button again
> Switch off the engine
The LED in the button goes out.
Manually unlocking parking lock
In the event of a power supply interrup-
tion such as a discharged or discon-
nected battery or an electrical malfunction, the
parking lock must be manually unlocked; other-
wise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the
vehicle cannot be towed.<
Only unlock the parking lock manually for
towing and make sure to set the parking brake
forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot
roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle
is parked.
Releasing
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Using the allen wrench from the tool kit,
refer to page 243, rotate the cover until it
reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove,
arrow 2.
4. Insert allen wrench into the opening,
arrow 1.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
70
Controls Driving
5. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the
stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked.
Do not turn allen wrench in the oppo-
site direction; otherwise, you may
damage the mechanism.<
6. Remove allen wrench from the opening.
After parking the vehicle, lock the parking
lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger
that the vehicle will roll.<
Locking
1. Press the button, see arrow.
The parking lock is locked again.
2. Replace cover again.
3. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into
place.
4. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Jump starting and towing, starting on
page 251.
Launch Control
Launch Control enables an optimum accelera-
tion when starting off on a road surface with
good traction.
Do not use Launch Control too often; oth-
erwise, the powerful stresses on the vehi-
cle will lead to premature component wear.<
Launch Control is ready for use when the
engine is at operating temperature, i.e. after
uninterrupted travel of at least 6.2 miles/10 km.
1. With the engine running, step on the brake
with your left foot.
2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC),
refer to page 90.
3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to
page 69.
4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the
manual mode and select 1
st
gear.
5. With your right foot, push the accelerator
pedal past the resistance point. The engine
speed for pulling away is adjusted. A flag
symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehi-
cle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal
floored.
7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long
as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed
past the resistance point.
Launch Control will be ready for use again after
you drive a certain distance.
Launch Control is not available for use during
the break-in phase, refer to page 124.
To maintain driving stability, keep DSC
activated whenever possible.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
71
Driving
Controls
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp and the turn signals indicates that
one of the turn signal bulbs has failed.<
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to signal a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Wiper system
Do not switch on the wipers if they immo-
bilized by ice; otherwise, damage to the
wiper blades and wiper motor may occur.<
Do not use the wipers when the window
glass is dry; otherwise, the wiper blades
may experience accelerated wear or damage.<
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
72
Controls Driving
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter-
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the
button lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumb wheel 5.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-
ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated with the engine running or the
ignition switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the
container.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
73
Driving
Controls
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container. Use
BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the
equivalent.
Washer fluid filler neck
Only add washer fluid after allowing the
engine to cool and close the cover com-
pletely in order to prevent the washer fluid from
contacting hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid
spills or leaks constitute a fire hazard and a risk
to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
The recommended minimum filling quantity is
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Fill with a mixture of window cleaner concen-
trate, tap water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Do not fill with undiluted window cleaner
concentrate or with pure water since these can
result in damage to the wiper system.
Do not mix window cleaner concentrates from
different manufacturers since this may clog the
washer nozzles.
Cruise control
The concept
You can use the cruise control feature begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The car then
stores and maintains the speed that you specify
using the lever on the steering column.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or
accelerating
2 Storing and maintaining speed or
decelerating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a previously stored speed
Maintaining current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly,
arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is briefly displayed in the instrument
cluster.
If the engine braking power is insufficient on a
downhill slope, the set speed may be exceeded.
On uphill grades vehicle speed may drop if the
engine output is insufficient.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
74
Controls Driving
Increasing speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
Each time the lever is pressed briefly, the speed
is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
Accelerating using the lever
Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed
is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever, arrow 2, until the
desired speed is reached.
The functions here are the same as for increas-
ing the speed or accelerating, except that the
speed will be decreased.
Deactivating cruise control
Push the lever briefly upwards or downwards,
arrow 3.
In addition, the system is automatically
deactivated:
> When the brakes are applied.
> When the clutch of the manual transmission
is engaged or the transmission is shifted
into neutral.
> When the automatic transmission selector
lever is moved into the neutral position N.
> When the selector lever of the sport auto-
matic transmission with double clutch is
moved into the neutral position N.
> When the vehicle travels faster or slower
than the set speed for an extended period,
e.g. when the accelerator is depressed.
> When DSC is intervening.
Resuming a previously stored speed
Press the button, arrow 4.
The last stored speed is resumed and
maintained.
The stored speed is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Display in the instrument cluster
When the speed at which the vehicle is traveling
is stored or when a stored speed is called up,
the speed is briefly displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
75
Controls overview
Controls
Controls overview
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to Units of mea-
sure on page 80.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 82.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +377/+36. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
76
Controls Controls overview
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
When the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/
1506.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a
message appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 14 US gal/53 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 221.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Fuel display 135i: in speedometer.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the remaining cruising range is dis-
played on the computer. Under a cruising range
of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message
remains in the Control Display.
With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid corner-
ing, engine functions are not always assured.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
77
Controls overview
Controls
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn signal/high beam
lever.
The following items of information are
displayed in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
> No information
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Units of measure on page 80.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
It is important that you refuel as soon as
possible once your cruising range falls
below 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine func-
tions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, refer to page 79, you
can have the average speed for another trip
displayed.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn signal/high beam lever for approx.
2seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
With the trip computer, refer to page 79, you
can have the average consumption for another
trip displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn signal/high beam lever for
approx. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
78
Controls Controls overview
Displays on the Control Display
The computer can also be opened via iDrive.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displaying "Onboard info":
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival if a destination has
been entered in the navigation system.
Displaying "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> The average speed and
> the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu entry.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Resetting the trip computer
You can reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
79
Controls overview
Controls
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set
values
> Calling up computer information 77
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 104
4 Calling up Check Control 84
5 Checking oil level 233
6 Setting the time 82
7 Setting the date 84
8 Viewing service requirement display 80
Exiting displays
The outside temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
80
Controls Controls overview
Units of measure
You can change the units for fuel consumption,
route/distance, temperature and pressure.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your dealership Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.
2. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "SERVICE-
INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
81
Controls overview
Controls
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
More information
Detailed information on service
requirements
You can call up additional information on the
maintenance regimen on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally
mandated inspection is approaching.
The service deadline has already passed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
82
Controls Controls overview
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, refer to page 84; other-
wise, the effectiveness of Condition Based
Service CBS is not ensured.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 237.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW center
prior to a service due date.
You can check when your BMW center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 32.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
time format on page 83.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
83
Controls overview
Controls
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the time and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. "Settings"
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.
Setting time zone
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
84
Controls Controls overview
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 32.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the date and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes-
sage includes indicator and warning lamps in
the instrument cluster and, in some circum-
stances, an acoustic signal as well as text
messages at the top of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
85
Controls overview
Controls
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. These Check Control messages
can be viewed again later, refer to page 85.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Supplemental text messages
You can call up more information on the Control
Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and
on how to respond, via Check Control.
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto-
matically.
To exit the display:
Select "OK" and press the Controller.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, you
can select from among the following functions
in the supplementary text messages.
> "Service request"
Contact your BMW center.
> "Roadside Assistance"
Contact BMW Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn signal/high beam
lever.
> Some Check Control messages are dis-
played continuously and remain visible until
the malfunction has been rectified. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this, they are displayed
again automatically.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
> Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "CHECK".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
86
Controls Controls overview
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages. If a Check Control mes-
sage has been stored, the corresponding
lamp lights up. It is accompanied by a text
message on the Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside
temperature and the time.
Via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
87
Controls overview
Controls
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Settings on the Control
Display
Language on the Control Display
Setting the language
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly
visible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
88
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Park Distance Control PDC
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator warn you of the presence of an object
behind your vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in
the bumper measure the distance.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the corner sensors or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
from the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed; oth-
erwise, physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. second
when you engage reverse gear or move the
automatic transmission selector lever to
position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 164 ft/50 m of driving or above
approx. 18 mph/30 km/h, the system switches
off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis-
tance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-
uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> If you stop in front of an object that has been
detected by only one of the corner sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
PDC is malfunctioning. Have the
system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.
PDC with visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis-
play before a signal tone sounds. The display
appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC
is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
89
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Loud sound sources out-
side or inside the car can drown out the PDC
signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously; oth-
erwise, there is a risk of personal injury or prop-
erty damage.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 126.
Electronic brake-force distribution
EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits
provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate. The system also recognizes unstable
driving conditions, for example if the rear of the
car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting
at an angle past the front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and DSC
OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have
been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing
and drive-output promoting actions are no
longer executed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
90
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
In the same way as with a differential interlock,
even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are
still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive
output if the drive wheels experience a signifi-
cant loss of traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: the DSC
controls the driving and braking forces.
If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC have failed.
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument
cluster: DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up and TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC con-
trols the driving and braking forces.
If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC have failed.
The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC-
TION is displayed in the instrument
cluster: DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
91
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the individ-
ual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre-
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized while the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been
corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reinitialize the system.
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
The system will not detect a natural, uniform
pressure loss in all four tires. Therefore, check
the tire inflation pressure regularly.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla-
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization by selecting "Reset".
6. Start driving.
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
92
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire pressure.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with
caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
With a damaged tire, is possible to continue
driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor-
rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be
initialized.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the
vehicle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles
such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, out-
side temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-
steering response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce
your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; oth-
erwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident. Do
not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
Check the inflation pressure in the four installed
tires. The system notifies you if there is a signif-
icant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
The system must have been reset while the
inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reli-
able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been
corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reset the system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
93
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
The system does not function correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated even though the tire inflation pres-
sures are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
> When a wheel without TPM electronics is
installed.
> Interference with TPM by other systems or
devices with the same transmission
frequency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the tires represents the status of
the tires and the system.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only required when this is
indicated by the TPM.
Green wheels
The inflation pressure corresponds to the
desired state.
"TPM active" appears in the Control Display.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire.
All wheels yellow
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in several tires.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Gray wheels
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Reasons for this may be:
> TPM is being reset.
> Interference from systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency.
> Malfunction.
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reset the system.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
94
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
5. Reset the inflation pressure by selecting
"Reset".
6. Start driving.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The resetting process
is completed automatically as you drive. On the
Control Display, the wheels are shown in green
and "Status: TPM active" is displayed.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When
driving resumes, resetting continues automati-
cally.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting, all tires on the Control Display
are displayed in yellow. The message "Low
tire!" is displayed.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps light up in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in the indicated wheel.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with
caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a low tire pressure is reported, the
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. The system must then
be reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the vehi-
cle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles
such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, out-
side temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steer-
ing response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate complete failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident. Do
not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
95
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Message for unsuccessful system
reset
Yellow warning lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control
Display.
The system has detected a wheel change, but
was not reset. A reliable warning is not possible
at the current inflation pressures.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 93.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the large warning lamp lights
up in yellow. The tires appear in gray
in the Control Display. No punctures can be
detected.
Display in the following situations:
> A wheel without TPM electronics has been
installed:
Have it checked by your BMW center.
> Malfunction
Have the system checked
> Tire Pressure Monitor was unable to
complete the resetting process. Reset the
system again.
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the large warning lamp lights
up in yellow. The tires appear in gray
in the Control Display.
Display in the following situations:
Interference from systems or devices that use
the same radio frequency. The system auto-
matically becomes active again when the vehi-
cle moves out of the interference zone.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-
icantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life and may affect the vehicle's han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure indicator.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
96
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Active steering
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-
ments. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low speed range,
e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering
angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes very
direct and less effort is required to turn the
wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced as the
speed increases. This improves the handling of
your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 89.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on. Active
steering is malfunctioning or is tem-
porarily deactivated. At low speeds,
greater steering wheel movements
are required, whereas at higher speeds the
vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering
wheel movements. The stability-enhancing
feature may also be deactivated. Drive cau-
tiously and think well ahead.
Deactivation
Active steering is deactivated to perform an ini-
tialization. A message indicates that the feature
is deactivated. Initialization may take several
minutes.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
If there is a defect, a corresponding text mes-
sage appears. Have the system checked.
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force
required to turn the wheels relative to the
vehicle speed.
At low speeds, the steering force is strongly
assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering.
As the vehicle speed increases, the steering
assisting power is reduced.
This system functions automatically.
Malfunctions
The warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Servotronic is malfunctioning or has
failed. Steering response will be different. You
can continue your journey, but moderate your
speed and exercise due caution. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Brake Force Display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
When the rear fog lamps are switched on, the
Brake Force Display is not active and the illumi-
nated area for normal braking is reduced by
approximately half.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
97
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
4 Convertible: knee airbags
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 49 to ensure the best possible
personal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and window on the front
passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with
adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach
holders such as for navigation instruments and
mobile phones.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes
the upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well
as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to
remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of faults, immobilization, or after the
airbag system has been triggered, only have the
testing, repair, or disassembly and scrapping of
gas generator performed by your BMW center
or a workshop that has the required explosives
licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on
the system could lead to failure in an emer-
gency or to undesired airbag activation, either
of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the
airbags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger
airbags below.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
98
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 58.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-
tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags lights up. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the rele-
vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is
not ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger front and side airbags in accordance
with whether and how the front passenger seat
is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether
the front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child restraint sys-
tem is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front
passenger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system. This particularly applies to
child seats that were required by NHTSA at
the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After
mounting a child seat, ensure that the indi-
cator lamp for the front passenger airbag is
lit. It indicates that the child seat has been
detected and that the front passenger air-
bags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on when,
for example, a person of sufficient size and
in a correct sitting position is detected on
the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front
passenger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front
passenger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 61, the
warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-
dent occurs.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
99
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is activated
automatically in the event of an accident of suf-
ficient severity or an extreme tilt in the car's lon-
gitudinal axis. The protection bars behind the
rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a
second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced
windshield frame, the rollover protection
system increases the safety of the vehicle
occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-
dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not
impacted after being automatically activated, it
can be reset by lowering the protection bars to
their original positions. This does not require
tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold
it there.
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from
above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps
into place.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec-
tion bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after an unexpected activation.
If the rollover protective system is
extended, do not operate the convertible
top.
Do not make any modifications to the individual
components of the rollover protection system
or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should
be performed only by your BMW center.
Faulty repair may lead to the failure of the sys-
tem or malfunctions.
To check the system and ensure flawless long-
term operation, always observe the service
intervals, refer to page 80.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
100
Controls Lamps
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Overview
0 Lamps off,
daytime running lights
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2 Low beams,
welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run-
ning lights, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant, Adaptive Light Control
Parking lamps/low beams,
automatic headlamp control
General information
When the driver's door is opened with ignition
switched off, then the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2, or 3.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
With halogen headlamps: when the ignition is
switched off and the switch is in position 1, only
the outside sections of the rear lamps are illumi-
nated, refer to page 246.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 102.<
Low-beam headlamps
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient lighting conditions, e.g. in a tun-
nel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The
Adaptive Light Control is active. The LED next
to the symbol is illuminated when the low
beams are on. You can also activate the daytime
running lights, refer to page 101. In the situa-
tions described above, the lamps then automat-
ically switch from daytime running lights to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on inde-
pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
101
Lamps
Controls
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Pathway lighting
If the headlamp flasher is activated after switch-
ing off the ignition with the lamps switched off,
the low beams come on and remain on for a
certain time.
Setting duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.:"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in switch
position 0, 1, and 3. They output less light than
the low beams.
The tail lamps may also light up.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lights
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
102
Controls Lamps
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves such as on switchbacks or when
turning, at speeds up to approx. 40 mph/
70 km/h, an additional, cornering light is
switched on that lights up the area inside the
curve.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 100.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
Standstill function: to avoid blinding oncoming
traffic, the Adaptive Light Control does not
direct light toward the driver's side when the
vehicle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi-
nating lamps are switched on and active on
both sides.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
The Adaptive Light Control is mal-
functioning or failed. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for approx.
1 second, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off. The procedure is controlled
by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview
mirror. The assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit-
uation allows. It handles this task for you and
gives you the benefit of the best possible view.
You can intervene at any time and switch the
high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 100.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn signal/high beam lever in the
direction of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high beams
are activated. The system automati-
cally switches from high beams to low beams
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
103
Lamps
Controls
and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic,
traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient
lighting, e.g. on city streets.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
Whenever you wish, or when the situation
requires, you can intervene:
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the
high beams, but you would like to drive with
the low beams, simply switch off the high
beams using the turn signal/high beam
lever. This deactivates the High-beam
Assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn signal/high beam lever toward the high
beams again.
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the
low beams, but you would like to drive with
the high beams, switch on the high beams
as usual. This deactivates the system and
the high beams need to be switched off
manually, if necessary.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn signal/high beam lever toward the high
beams again.
> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the
low beams switched on.
System limitations
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal
judgment of when to use the high beams.
Therefore, manually switch off the high beams
in situations where this is required to avoid a
safety risk.<
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
> In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation
> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings
> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways
> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs
> At low speeds
> When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered with stickers, etc.
> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror using
a cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass cleaner.
Activating via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Fog lamps
To switch on/off, press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
104
Controls Lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must
be switched on for the fog lamps to
operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up whenever the
fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you acti-
vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high
beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the brightness level and
the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside
temperature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps, entry
lamps, trunk lamp, and courtesy lamps are
controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To reduce the drain on the battery, a few
minutes after the radio readiness is
switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on
page 61, all lights in the vehicle's passenger
compartment are switched off.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
entry lamps, and courtesy lamps permanently,
press the button for the front interior lamps for
about 3 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
105
Lamps
Controls
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear,
next to the interior lights. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
106
Controls Climate
Climate
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Overview
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area:
Draft-free ventilation 109
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature, left side
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
107
Climate
Controls
8 Air volume, manual adjustment; AUTO
intensity
9 Display
10 Automatic recirculated air control AUC/
Recirculated air mode
11 Temperature, right side
12 ALL program
13 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
14 Switching air conditioning on/off manually
15 Rear window defroster
16 Seat heating, right side 54
17 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
clear
18 Seat heating, left side 54
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution
and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to
AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 33.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell.
The automatic air distribution can be switched
back on by pressing the AUTO button. The air
conditioning is switched on automatically and
the manual air distribution setting is cleared.
Temperature
Turn to set the desired tempera-
ture.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible regardless of the season,
using maximum cooling or heating power if
necessary, and then maintains it.
Avoid rapid switching between different tem-
perature settings. The automatic climate con-
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The system cools steadily in the lowest setting,
regardless of the outside temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest
temperature, maximum air volume
and recirculated air mode.
Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper
body region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible
> Above an outside temperature of approx.
327/06
> When the engine is running
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution and
temperature are controlled auto-
matically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is
directed toward the windshield, the side
windows, the upper body and the footwell.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the air conditioning.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
108
Controls Climate
At the same time, a condensation sensor
controls the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
The program is switched off when the air distri-
bution is set manually or the button is pressed
again.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, auto-
matic control of the air volume and air
distribution can be adjusted:
Press the left side of the button to
reduce the intensity. Press the
right side of the button to
increase it.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Convertible Program
The Convertible Program is active when the
convertible top is open and the AUTO program
is switched on. During the Convertible Program,
the automatic climate control is optimized for
driving with the soft top down. In addition, the
air volume is increased as vehicle speed
increases.
The effectiveness of the Convertible
Program can be enhanced considerably
by installing the wind deflector.<
Adjusting air volume manually
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left side of the button to
reduce the air volume. Press the
right side of the button to
increase it.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The
display remains the same.
Automatic recirculated air control
AUC/Recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollut-
ants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to
select an operating mode:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and
controls the shut-off automatically.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off
recirculated air mode and increase the air
volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow onto the windshield.
The recirculated air mode should not be
used continuously for lengthy periods;
otherwise, the quality of the air inside the car
will gradually deteriorate.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recircu-
lated air mode and the previous mode using a
button on the steering wheel, refer to page 13.
ALL program
Press the button.
The current temperature setting
on the driver's side is transferred to
the front passenger side.
If the temperature setting on the driver's side is
changed, the temperature on the front passen-
ger side is changed as well.
The program is switched off when the setting
is adjusted on the front passenger side or the
button is pressed again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
109
Climate
Controls
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windshield and
front side windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the air
conditioning.
Switching air conditioning on/off
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled while the engine is running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and – depending on the tempera-
ture setting – warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the air conditioning.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
upper wires serve as an antenna and are not
part of the rear window defroster.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press and hold the left button or
press the left button at the lowest
level.
All displays are cleared except for the rear
window defroster if it is switched on.
The outside air supply is blocked when
the automatic climate control is switched
off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window
fogs over, switch the system back on and
increase the air volume.<
Switching on
Press any button, except the buttons for the
ALL program or the rear window defroster.
Ventilation
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the levers to change the direction of the
airflow
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, e.g. if it has become too hot
in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-
ter replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
110
Controls Climate
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary.
For any outside temperature, the system can be
switched on or off directly or via a preset
switch-on time. It will remain on for 30 minutes.
Due to its high power consumption, the parked
car ventilation system should not be switched
on twice in a row without driving in between to
allow the battery to recharge.
Open the vents so that air can flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Switching on and off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
111
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Practical interior accessories
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote
control
The concept
The Integrated universal remote control can be
used to operate up to 3 functions of remote-
controlled devices such as garage door open-
ers or lighting systems. The Integrated univer-
sal remote control thus replaces as many as
three different hand-held transmitters. To oper-
ate them, the buttons on the interior rearview
mirror must be programmed with the desired
functions. Programming requires the hand-held
transmitter for the respective device.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control to operate a
device, always inspect the immediate area to
make certain that no people, animals or objects
are within the pivoting or travel range of the
device being operated.
Also follow the safety instructions supplied with
the hand-held transmitter.<
For security reasons, make sure to delete the
stored functions before selling the vehicle, refer
to page 113.
Compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
device to be operated, you can gener-
ally assume that the device is compatible with
the Integrated universal remote control.
For additional questions, please consult:
> Your BMW center.
> www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
1 LED
2 Buttons
3 Hand-held transmitter, required for
programming.
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial operation:
Simultaneously hold down the right and
left buttons on the inside mirror for approx.
20 seconds until the LED on the inside
mirror flashes.
All programs of the buttons on the rearview
mirror are deleted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
112
Controls Practical interior accessories
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the
device to be controlled about 1 in/2.5 cm to
3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the
inside mirror.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be pro-
grammed on the inside mirror.
The LED on the inside mirror will flash
slowly at first.
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
that the button on the inside mirror has
been programmed.
If the LED does not flash rapidly within
60 seconds, change the distance between
the inside mirror and the hand-held trans-
mitter and repeat this step. This may
require several attempts. Allow at least
15 seconds between attempts.
6. To program additional functions on the
other buttons of the inside mirror, repeat
steps 3 through 5.
The buttons on the inside mirror can be used to
operate the devices if the ignition is switched
on.
Special procedure with alternating-
code systems
If the device fails to function even after repeated
programming, check whether the device to be
controlled uses an alternating-code system.
To do so, either read the instructions for the
device or hold down the programmed button on
the inside mirror. If the LED on the inside mirror
flashes quickly at first and then remains lit for
2 seconds, the device uses an alternating-code
system. The LED flashes and lights up repeat-
edly for approx. 20 seconds.
In devices with an alternating-code system, the
Integrated universal remote control and the
device must also be synchronized.
For information about synchronizing can also
be found in the operating instructions for the
device to be set.
Programming will be easier with the aid of a
second person.
Synchronizing:
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the Integrated universal remote
control as described above.
3. Locate and press the synchronization
button on the device to be set. You have
approx. 30 seconds to perform the next
step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
inside mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then
release it. Repeat this operation, up to three
times if necessary, to complete the syn-
chronization. If the synchronization has
succeeded, the programmed function is
performed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the
device to be controlled about 1 in/2.5 cm to
3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the
inside mirror.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
3. Press the desired button on the inside
mirror.
4. If the LED on the inside mirror flashes
slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the
transmit key of the hand-held transmitter.
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release
both buttons.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after
approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and
repeat the step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
113
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly
after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step or, if the programming
by means of the hand-held transmitter was
interrupted, hold down the button on the
inside mirror and then press and release the
button on the hand-held transmitter several
times, holding it down for 2 seconds each
time.
Operation
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control to operate a
device, always inspect the immediate area to
make certain that no people, animals or objects
are within the pivoting or travel range of the
device being operated.
Also follow the safety instructions supplied with
the hand-held transmitter.<
The button on the inside mirror can be used to
operate the device, for example the garage
door, if the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on. To do so, within the reception
range of the device, press the button of the
device until the function is triggered. The LED
on the inside mirror remains lit during transmis-
sion of the radio signal.
Deleting stored functions
Simultaneously hold down the right and left
buttons on the inside mirror for approx. 20 sec-
onds until the LED on the inside mirror flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Digital compass
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: setting the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
114
Controls Practical interior accessories
To set the compass zones, press the setting
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the convertible top
is fully closed.
4. Press the setting button approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in a
complete circle at least once at a maximum
speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
If the calibration is successful, display C is
replaced with the points of the compass.
5. Convertible: open the convertible top fully
and repeat step 4.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Setting the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the setting button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
115
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold the cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the
integrated key of the remote control, refer to
page 32.
USB interface for data transmission
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections, refer to
page 173.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains a credit card holder and, depending on
the equipment version, a compartment or a
snap-in adapter.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the vehicle speakers:
> AUX-IN port, refer to page 177.
> USB audio interface/extended connectivity
of the music player in the mobile phone,
refer to page 178.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
116
Controls Practical interior accessories
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Compartments are located next to the steering
column, on the doors, in the center console, and
in the rear between the seats.
Do not place unsecured objects in them;
otherwise, they could endanger the car's
occupants, e.g. in the event of braking or
evasive maneuvers.<
Do not place non-slip pads, e.g. anti-slip
mats, on the dashboard; the materials of
these pads may damage it.<
Coupe: clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks in the rear.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks; other-
wise, they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden
swerving.<
Cupholders
Use lightweight and shatterproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the cupholders; other-
wise, damage could result.<
There is one cupholder in the center console.
You can mount an attachable cupholder on the
side of the center console.
Ashtray
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
117
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always switch off the
ignition and remove the remote control so that
children cannot operate the cigarette lighter
and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum
cleaner, etc. if at least one of the following
sockets is available.
The total load of all sockets should not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Do not connect battery chargers to the
sockets built into the vehicle at the plant;
doing so may damage the vehicle.<
Reinsert cigarette lighter or socket cover
after use; otherwise items that fall into the
cigarette lighter receptacle or the socket can
cause a short circuit.<
Cigarette lighter socket
To access the socket:
Open the front ashtray and remove the ciga-
rette lighter or cover from the socket.
In the center console
To access the socket, refer to External devices
on page 177.
Coupe: through-loading
system
Opening
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the trunk.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
When returning the backrest into the
seating position, make sure that the
seat's locking mechanism is properly engaged.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
118
Controls Practical interior accessories
Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around and
endanger the occupants in the event of sharp
braking or swerving.<
The lashing eyes in the trunk provide you with a
way to attach trunk nets or draw straps for
securing suitcases and luggage, refer to
page 127.
Convertible: cargo loading
Enlarging the trunk
When the convertible top is closed you can
enlarge the trunk:
To do so, fold the trunk partition upward.
Before opening the convertible top, pull the
trunk partition down until it engages.
Ensure that pointed objects do not press
against the trunk partition from below.
The convertible top can only be opened
when the trunk partition is folded down.<
Storage compartments inside
the trunk
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the left
side trim panel of the trunk will contain a rubber
strap for securing small objects such as a fold-
ing umbrella.
The lashing eyes in the trunk provide you with a
way to attach trunk nets or draw straps for
securing suitcases and luggage, refer to
page 128.
Coupe: ski bag
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m
length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski
bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
Ensure that the skis are clean when they are
loaded into the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to
prevent damage.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover. To stabilize the cover
in the folded-down position, place the
center panel underneath it.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
4. Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining
strap to the eyelet on the side of the ski bag
opening.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
119
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW
center.<
Convertible: through-loading
opening with integrated
transport bag
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean
transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up
to 2 snowboards.
With the transport bag you can stow skis up to a
length of 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m
length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski
bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
When using the transport bag, it is not
permissible to transport passengers in
the rear seats.<
Loading
1. Pull the grip in the filler piece of the rear
backrest up and take out the filler piece.
2. Place the filler piece onto the seat cushion
with the backrest side facing up.
3. In the trunk: press the two recesses
together and fold down the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
120
Controls Practical interior accessories
4. Release the strap, lay out the transport bag
between the front seats and load it.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
Ensure that the skis are clean when you load
them into the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges
to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
121
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
124
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a
road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on several factors. You can lower fuel consump-
tion and the environmental impact by taking
certain measures, adjusting your driving style
and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
Remove any unneeded cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you
have finished using them
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof
rack and the rear luggage rack after use.
Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam-
ics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher
air resistance and thus increases fuel
consumption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
125
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a
month and before embarking on a long journey,
and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is
still standing, but set off immediately at moder-
ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the
cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking
maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis-
tance between you and the vehicle in front of
you. A defensive and smooth driving style
keeps fuel consumption down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Use first gear only for driving off. In second and
higher gears, accelerate without hesitation or
pauses. When accelerating, shift up before
reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con-
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high-
est applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel-
erator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings
or in traffic congestions.
Switch off functions you do not need at
the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner, seat
heating or rear window defroster draw large
amounts of power and consume additional fuel.
Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driv-
ing they have a considerable impact. Therefore,
switch these functions off when they are not
really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW
recommends having the vehicle serviced at
your BMW center. Also note the BMW Mainte-
nance System, refer to page 237.
General driving notes
Close the trunk lid
Only drive with the trunk closed. Failure to
do so may endanger passengers or other
road users or may damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident or a braking and evasive
maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may flow
into the passenger compartment.<
If special circumstances make it absolutely
necessary to drive with the trunk open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the
automatic climate control system, refer to
page 108.
3. Drive cautiously.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
126
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed in
its vicinity, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes.
Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<
Mobile phones in the vehicle
It is not advisable to use wireless devices
such as mobile phones inside the vehicle
without a direct connection to an external aerial.
Otherwise, it is not possible to exclude the pos-
sibility of a reciprocal interference occurring
between the vehicle electronics and the wire-
less device. Otherwise, there is no assurance
that the radiation generated by the radio trans-
mission will be conveyed out of the passenger
compartment.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with
declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to
Minimum tread depth on page 229.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater
clutch wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off
assistant, refer to page 90.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the movement range of the
pedals
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an
existing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely
fastened again after they have been removed,
e.g. for cleaning.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors. Full
braking efficiency will then be available when
you need it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
127
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, all the way to first gear if nec-
essary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Down-
shifting in manual mode of the automatic
transmission, refer to page 65.
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch: never drive with the transmission
in neutral or with the engine switched off; other-
wise, there will be no engine braking action and
no power assistance to the brakes and steering.
Manual transmission: never drive with the
clutch held down, with the transmission in neu-
tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise,
there will be no engine braking action and no
power assistance to the brakes and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic
climate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. In some situations,
this can result in sudden loss of tire pressure.<
Avoid fluid spills in the trunk as they could
damage the vehicle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise damage to
the vehicle may occur and unstable driving
conditions may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
128
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the sum of the occu-
pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The
greater the weight of the occupants, the less
cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
Coupe
Convertible
Storing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far
forward as possible, ideally directly behind
the respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Securing cargo
> Secure smaller and lighter items using draw
straps.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps for securing larger
and heavier objects are available at your
BMW center. To attach the cargo straps,
there are two lashing eyes on the inside wall
of the trunk.
Comply with the information enclosed with
the load-securing devices.
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 259, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the
occupants.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
129
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 60, otherwise, these could be damaged.<
Coupe: roof-mounted
luggage rack
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
Fold open the cover.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 259.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting
the glass roof, and that objects do not project
into the opening path of the trunk lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
132
Navigation Navigation system
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre-
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satel-
lites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide
you to every entered destination.
Enter data only with the vehicle station-
ary, and always give priority to the appli-
cable traffic regulations in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.<
Accessing navigation system
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation"
The navigation system can also be
accessed directly with the button on the
controller.
Navigation data
General information
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your BMW center. Navigation
data are stored in the vehicle and can be
updated.
> Depending on the data volume, a data
update may take several hours.
> Update data while driving to reduce the
drain on the battery.
> Only the main functions of the navigation
system are available during updating.
The update is resumed automatically when a
trip is continued after an interruption.
> You can inquire as to the status of the
update.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the update, the system restarts.
> The medium that holds the navigation
data can be removed after the update is
completed.
Information about navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version":
Information about the data version is
displayed.
Updating the navigation data
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga-
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
133
Navigation system
Navigation
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Querying status
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation update"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
134
Navigation Destination entry
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 136
> Last destinations, refer to page 137
> Special destinations, refer to page 137
> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 139
> Selecting home address, refer to page 137
> Destination entry via voice, refer to
page 140
> Destination entry via BMW Assist, refer to
page 139
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 25.
Entering a destination
manually
To make it easier to enter town/city names and
street names, the system assists you with auto-
matic name completion and entry comparison,
refer to page 143. This makes it possible to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored town/city
names and street names can be accessed
quickly.
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the
following features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of state/province and
town/city if the current entries should be
retained for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or displayed
country.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the
displayed town/city.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
135
Destination entry
Navigation
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is reduced in steps with each entry.
To delete letters:
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller.
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
To enter spaces:
> Select the symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the
displayed town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Select an entry.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street and cross-street the same
way you entered the town/city.
After you enter the street, you can also enter
the cross street or the house number.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: entering street and house
number
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street the same way you entered
the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the digits.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
No such street at the destination
The desired street is not in the entered town/
city because it belongs to another district of the
town/city.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" displayed country.
All streets of the entered country are
offered. The corresponding town/city is
displayed after the street name.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight street.
9. Select the street.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
136
Navigation Destination entry
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation", refer to page 141.
> Setting "Route preference", refer to
page 143.
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer
to page 137.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 212.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as
destinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer to
page 202.
3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired,
using the "A-Z search".
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address"
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
6. Select an existing contact, if available.
7. "Business address" or "Home address"
8. "Last name" and "First name" if you wish.
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
137
Destination entry
Navigation
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist-
ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using the home address as a
destination
The home address must be created. Specifying
a home address, refer to page 212.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations".
Special destinations
General information
Even with the most up-to-date navigation data,
information about certain special destinations
may have changed; for example, filling stations
may not be in operation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
138
Navigation Destination entry
Opening the search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
Searching online
1. "Google™ Local Search"
2. Select the special destination.
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
Special destination location
As you input the search destination, you can
select from among various options.
> "At current location"
> "At destination"
> "At different location"
> "Along route"
A-Z search
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details.
Move the controller toward the left to exit
category details.
7. "Keyword"
8. Enter keyword.
A list of the special destinations is
displayed.
9. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
10. Select the symbol.
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation". Adding destination as another
destination, refer to page 141.
"Start search": without entering a search term,
the search is repeated with the last stored
search term.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details.
Move the controller toward the left to exit
category details.
7. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is
displayed.
8. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
9. Select the symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation". Adding destination as another
destination, refer to page 141.
Displaying special destinations
List of special destinations: the special destina-
tions are displayed in order of their distance and
are displayed with a direction arrow pointing
toward the destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
139
Destination entry
Navigation
With the Professional navigation system:
In the split screen, special destinations from the
selected category are displayed as symbols in
the map view. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.
Destination entry via BMW Assist
A connection to the BMW Concierge service is
established, refer to page 213.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Destination entry via map
If you only know the location of a destination or
street, then you can enter the destination with
the aid of the map.
Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is displayed
on the map.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
5. Press the controller to display additional
menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance"
or "Add as another destination".
> "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis-
plays one of the following pieces of information:
> A street name in the vicinity.
> The district.
> The coordinates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
140
Navigation Destination entry
> Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
> "Exit interactive map":
Go back to the map view.
> "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
> "Display destination":
The section of the map around the
destination is displayed.
> "Display current location":
The section of the map around the
current position is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 137.
Destination entry via voice
General information
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
> During the destination entry by voice, you
can switch between voice operation and
entry via iDrive at any time. To do so,
reactivate the voice activation system if
necessary.
> Having the possible spoken commands
read aloud: {Voice commands}
Saying the entries
> With the Professional navigation system:
City/town, street, and house number can be
entered with a single command.
> Countries, towns and cities, streets and
intersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the system language, refer to
page 87.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> Spell the entry if the language spoken in the
area is different from the system language.
> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag-
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
> The methods of entry depend on the navi-
gation data in use and on the country and
language settings.
Entering an address in a command
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address aloud in the suggested
order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g. the town/city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city name can be spoken as a
complete word or spelled.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city or say at least
the first three letters.
2. {Enter address}
2. {City} or {Spell city}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
141
Destination entry
Navigation
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/
cities may be suggested.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities that sound the same are compiled
in a separate list and are displayed as one town/
city followed by three dots.
1. Select an entry:
2. Select the desired town/city.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive: turn the controller until the town/city
is selected and press the controller.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
manner as the town/city.
Entering a house number
Depending on the data in the navigation sys-
tem, house numbers up to the number 2,000
can be entered:
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Planning a trip with
intermediate destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned using intermediate
destinations.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. "Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is inserted
into the destination list and highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is at the desired place in the list.
6. Press the controller.
5. Select a location:
> To select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {New
entry}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry …}
> To spell an entry: {Spell city}
{Yes} or {Entry …} e.g. entry 2.
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted
by the system.
{Start guidance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
142
Navigation Destination entry
Starting the trip
After entering all intermediate destinations,
highlight the first destination and say "Start
guidance"
For example if the second destination is high-
lighted at the start of route guidance, then the
first destination is skipped over.
The symbol indicates the active intermedi-
ate destination.
Storing a trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list.
Delete existing trips as necessary to permit you
to store new trips.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter a name.
4. "OK"
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
Selecting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Trips, changing
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in
reverse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Options for intermediate destinations
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
> "Edit destination"
> "Reposition dest. in the trip": move the
intermediate destination within the list.
> "Delete dest. in the trip"
> "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not possible for some trips.
Deleting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
Selecting last trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
143
Destination guidance
Navigation
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Entering a destination, refer to page 134.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
The route is displayed on the Control Display
after it is calculated.
In the map view, the distance to the destination/
intermediate destination and the estimated
time of arrival are displayed.
The arrow display appears on the Control
Display, if so desired.
Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance".
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
> You can influence the calculated route by
selecting certain trip criteria.
> Route criteria can be changed during desti-
nation entry and during route guidance.
> Street types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into account in route plan-
ning, e.g. avoiding highways.
> The proposed route can differ from
personal experience.
> The settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
> Route guidance with traffic bulletins, refer
to page 149.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Fast route": time-optimized route
through a combination of the least pos-
sible distance and stretches of road that
allow rapid driving.
> "ECO PRO route": optimized
combination of the fastest and shortest
possible route.
> "Short route": short distance without
taking time into account.
> "Alternative routes": are suggested,
where possible, during active route
guidance.
The individual suggestions are labeled in
color.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
144
Navigation Destination guidance
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> "Avoid highways": highways are avoided
where possible.
> "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
where possible.
> "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Route
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, vari-
ous views of the route are available during route
guidance:
> Arrow display on the Control Display.
> List of route segments.
> Map view, refer to page 145.
Arrow display
The following information is displayed during
route guidance:
> Large arrow: current direction of travel.
> Small arrow: indicates the next change of
direction.
> Intersection view.
> Lane information.
> Traffic bulletins.
> Distance to the next change of direction.
> Street name of the next change of direction.
Lane information
In the arrow display, the recommended lanes
of multi-lane roads are each marked with a
triangle.
> Filled triangle: optimum lane.
> Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It
can, however, also be possible to briefly
make additional lane changes.
Displaying the list of route segments
If the route guidance has been started, then you
can display a list of route segments. The dis-
tance to be traveled and traffic bulletins are
displayed for each segment of the route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight the route segment.
The route segment is displayed in the preview
map.
Bypassing a section of the route
During route guidance, prompt the navigation
system to bypass certain route segments. In
doing so, you will specify how many kilometers
to travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired
mileage.
5. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
145
Destination guidance
Navigation
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendations
The remaining range is calculated and filling
stations along the route are displayed.
Even with the most up-to-date navigation data,
information about certain special destinations
may have changed; for example, filling stations
may not be in operation.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of filling stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance": route guidance to the
selected filling station is started.
"Add as another destination": the filling sta-
tion is incorporated into the route.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Voice instructions"
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory key, refer to page 25.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Map view
Displaying the map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Overview
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
146
Navigation Destination guidance
1 Toolbar
2 Route segment with traffic obstruction
3 Road sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status box
7 Lower status box
Lines on the map
Streets and roads are depicted with different
colors and lines according to their classification.
Dotted lines represent railroad and ferry con-
nections. National borders are depicted with
thin lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route identify
route segments with traffic obstructions,
depending on map scale. The direction of the
triangles indicates the direction of the obstruc-
tion.
Road signs classify the obstructions.
> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the
planned route or direction of travel.
> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not
relate to the planned route or direction of
travel.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 147.
Planned route
After route guidance is started, the planned
route is displayed on the map.
Status boxes
Show/hide: press the controller.
> Upper status box: time, phone details, and
entertainment details.
> Lower status box: symbol for active route
guidance, traffic bulletin status, arrival time,
and distance from destination.
Toolbar
The following functions are available directly in
the map view:
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
> To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the con-
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the
map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your
location to the destination.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
Set the optimized map view.
Symbol Function
Starting/stopping destination
guidance
Switching voice instructions on/
off
Changing route criteria or
selecting route alternatives
Special destinations
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map view settings
Changing scale
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
147
Destination guidance
Navigation
> "Day/night mode"
Select and adjust depending on light
conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
Settings are not taken into account.
> "Satellite images"
Depending on the availability and resolu-
tion, satellite images are displayed in scales
of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
> "Perspective view in 3D"
Displays a three-dimensional view. Promi-
nent areas that are contained in the naviga-
tion data are displayed on the map in 3D.
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins. Symbols for the special destina-
tions are no longer displayed.
Map view for the split screen display
The map view for the split screen can be
selected separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
4. Select "Split screen content" or scale.
5. Select the map view:
> "Arrow display"
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Map view with perspective"
> "Position"
> "Exit ramp view"
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
6. To change the scale: switch to the split
screen and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins
Overview
> You can display the traffic bulletins from
radio stations that broadcast the TMC
(Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic infor-
mation service. Bulletins about traffic
obstructions and hazards are continuously
updated.
> Traffic bulletins are indicated by symbols on
the map.
> Traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are
stored in a list.
The symbol in the toolbar of the map view
turns red if a traffic bulletin relates to the
calculated route.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-
User is in material breach of the terms and
conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net-
work") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
148
Navigation Destination guidance
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho-
rized or unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit-
ted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material will
be error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limita-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing
or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost rev-
enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so those particular limita-
tions may not apply to you.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Accessing traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order
of their distance from the current vehicle
position.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information":
Display additional information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if desired.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Con-
trol Display changes to a grayscale display. This
enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The
day/night mode is disregarded in this setting.
Symbols or special destinations are no longer
displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the
location of the traffic obstruction along the
route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions
are displayed.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc-
tion's length, direction and impact are displayed
on the map using triangles or gray bars along
the calculated route.
> Red: traffic congestion
> Orange: stop-and-go traffic
> Yellow: heavy traffic
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
149
Destination guidance
Navigation
> Green: clear roads
> Gray: general traffic information, e.g.
construction zone
The bulletins displayed depend in the respec-
tive traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
Set which traffic bulletins are displayed on the
map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins from the selected categories
are displayed on the map.
> Traffic bulletins that lie on the route are
always shown.
> For your personal safety, it is not possible to
hide traffic bulletins that announce a poten-
tial hazard.
Route guidance with traffic bulletins
Semi-dynamic route guidance
With traffic bulletin reception switched on,
semi-dynamic route guidance is active.
The system takes into account the existing traf-
fic bulletins during route guidance. A message
is displayed as a function of the route, the traffic
bulletins, and the possible alternate routes. In
the event of a traffic obstruction, an alternate
route will be suggested if possible.
The upper part of the message shows:
> The symbol of the first traffic obstruction,
possibly with the remaining distance before
the start of the traffic obstruction.
> Total length of traffic obstructions on the
route.
> Extension of driving time due to the traffic
obstructions
The lower part of the message shows:
> Suggested alternate route with remaining
distance before the start of the alternate
route.
> Difference of the route length compared to
the original route.
> Time gained by taking the alternate route
compared to the original route with the
traffic obstructions.
In addition to the original route displayed in
white, the split screen will also show the alter-
nate route.
Taking an alternate route:
"Detour"
With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the
roadway, a message is displayed without a
possible alternate route.
It is also possible to take alternate routes can
also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed
via the list:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
> The system does not point out traffic
obstructions along the original route.
> Traffic bulletins will continue to be dis-
played on the map.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
150
Navigation Destination guidance
> Depending on the type of road and the
nature and length of the traffic obstruction,
the route can also be calculated so that you
travel through the traffic obstruction.
> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of
the setting.
To activate dynamic route guidance:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
151
What to do if …
Navigation
What to do if …
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
What to do if…
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position.
Reception is generally available when you
are in the open.
> The destination guidance does not accept a
destination without a street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
> The destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Choose a destination as
close as possible to the original one.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in grayscale?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
Control Display changes to a grayscale
display. This enables a better view of the
traffic bulletins.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new route suggestion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
154
Entertainment On/off and tone
On/off and tone
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
> Radio
> CD/DVD player
> Video
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using the:
> Buttons near the CD/DVD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 13
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 25
> Voice activation system
Buttons near the CD/DVD player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off,
volume
> Press: switch on/off
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjusting the volume
2 Eject the CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
4FM/AM: change the radio station
waveband
5MODE: change the audio and video
sources
6 Station scan/track search
> Change the radio station
> Select the track for the CD/DVD player
and certain multimedia devices
Switching on/off
To switch the entertainment audio output on or
off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates
that sound output is switched off.
The sound output is available for approx.
20 minutes after the ignition was switched off.
For sound output, switch the unit back on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
155
On/off and tone
Entertainment
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the
desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 13.
Setting tone controls
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Treble": treble adjustment.
> "Bass": bass adjustment.
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone setting.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
156
Entertainment On/off and tone
Multi-channel playback, surround
You can choose between stereo and multi-
channel playback, surround.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
When surround is activated, multi-channel
playback is simulated when playing an audio
track in stereo.
Volume levels
> "Speed volume": volume is adapted
depending on the speed
> "PDC": volume of the PDC acoustic signal
relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g.
for the acoustic Safety Belt Reminder rela-
tive to the entertainment sound output
> "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone conversation.
> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker
during a phone conversation.
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
157
Radio
Entertainment
Radio
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
Your radio is designed for reception of the
following stations:
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
> Satellite radio
Selecting a station
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn the controller and press it
or
Press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer
to page 13.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
158
Entertainment Radio
4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Renaming a radio station
An FM station with changing station names can
be renamed.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait until the desired name
appears.
The selected station name is added to the list of
current stations and stored stations.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer to page 25.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press and hold the desired
button.
RDS – Radio Data System
In the FM waveband, additional information is
transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. If the reception is weak or dis-
rupted, it can take some time before the station
names are displayed.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
159
Radio
Entertainment
HD Radio™ reception
Many radio stations transmit analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
HD radio technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.
and foreign patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,
HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade-
marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
When setting a station that has a digital signal, it
may take several seconds before the station
plays in digital quality.
Instructions for HD stations whose station
name ends with ...HD or ...HD1:
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Instructions for HD multicast stations whose
station name ends with ...HD2 or ...HD3:
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, interruptions in the
audio signal may occur, which can last for sev-
eral seconds. This depends on the reception.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
The symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. The sta-
tion names of the substations end in HD2, HD3,
etc.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted
for several seconds.
Presets
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
160
Entertainment Radio
Storing stations
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
You can also store the stations on the program-
mable memory keys, refer to page 25.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
161
Satellite radio
Entertainment
Satellite radio
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
The channels are offered in fixed packages.
Packages must be activated by telephone.
Navigation bar
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 25.
Managing subscription
Clear reception is required for activating and
deactivating channels. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The
channel name is displayed in the status line.
Activating channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels
category.
5. Select desired channel.
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Dial the telephone number to have the
channels activated.
This telephone number can also be used to
deactivate the channels.
Deactivating channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
Symbol Function
Changing list view
Selecting category
Entering channel directly
Time shift
Accessing favorites, selecting
the My Favorites category
Managing favorites
Traffic Jump
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
162
Entertainment Satellite radio
4. "Manage subscription"
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to activated channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired
category.
4. Select desired channel.
Via the button in the area of the
CD/DVD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The next channel is selected.
Using direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or a desired category.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
You can also store the channels on the pro-
grammable memory keys, refer to page 25.
Changing list view
The list view changes each time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information about the channel is displayed.
Symbol Function
Channel name
Artist
Track
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
163
Satellite radio
Entertainment
Selecting category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Time shift
Approximately one hour of the channel cur-
rently being listened to is temporarily stored in a
cache memory. Prerequisite: the signal must be
available.
The stored audio track can be played back at a
different time from the live broadcast. If the
cache memory is full, then the older tracks are
recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if
a new channel is selected.
Accessing Time shift
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
> The red arrow indicates the current
playback position.
> The time difference from the live broadcast
is displayed next to the cache memory bar.
> For live transmissions: "live".
Time shift menu
Automatic time shift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
> Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
> Activation of the voice activation system.
> Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
Activating
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
Deactivating
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Possible favorites include artist, track,
game, league, and team.
Symbol Function
Go to live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic time shift deactivated/
activated
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
164
Entertainment Satellite radio
Storing artist, track, or game
Only current broadcasts can be stored as favor-
ites. The channel information must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired
category.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select artist, track, or game.
Storing league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the desired league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.
Accessing favorites
If an activated favorite is being played, the
message "Favorite alert!" appears for approx.
20 seconds.
Select "Favorites" while the alert message
is being displayed.
The displayed favorite will be played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All of the favorites
currently being broadcast can be selected from
a list.
Managing favorites
Activating/deactivating favorites
Favorites can be activated or deactivated
globally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
165
Satellite radio
Entertainment
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region are broadcast at intervals of a few
minutes.
Selecting region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Activating/deactivating Jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
As soon as information about the selected
region becomes available, it is broadcast.
A new panel appears in the display.
Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update
of the names and positions of the channels. The
update occurs automatically and can take
several minutes.
Notes
> Under some circumstances, reception may
not be possible, e.g. under certain environ-
mental or topographical conditions. The
satellite radio has no influence on this.
> The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages or near trees, moun-
tains, or other powerful sources of radio
interference.
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast
soon.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
166
Entertainment CD/DVD player
CD/DVD player
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
CD/DVD playback
Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing up. The CD/DVD is drawn in
automatically.
Playback starts automatically if the sound
output is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed
audio files, it can take several minutes to read in
the data, depending on the directory structure.
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
M4A
Starting playback
A CD/DVD is in the CD/DVD player.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Ejecting a CD/DVD
Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
Selecting a track using iDrive
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
167
CD/DVD player
Entertainment
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and
numbers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed
correctly.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
5. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
> Track file name
Random sequence playback
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played
once in random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all the
tracks in the selected directory are played in
random sequence.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed or the ignition is switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
168
Entertainment CD/DVD player
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
Video playback
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
Starting playback
For your own safety, the video image is only dis-
played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some
market-specific versions, only with the parking
brake engaged or the selector lever of the auto-
matic transmission is in the park position.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
The CD/DVD is started.
Video menu
To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is
displayed.
The Video menu is displayed:
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South
America, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
0 All regions
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu
Starting playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous
track
Fast forward
Reverse
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
169
CD/DVD player
Entertainment
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
Video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the
controller and select "Back".
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; also refer to the information on
your DVD.
Language
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Subtitles
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed, and then press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
170
Entertainment CD/DVD player
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Camera angle
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players are officially desig-
nated Class 1 laser products. Do not
operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles; other-
wise, the CDs or the adapter might jam and no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD players have been optimized for
performance in vehicles. In some instances
they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs
than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this may be due to one of the following
reasons
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, for example, inconsis-
tent data-creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
171
CD/DVD player
Entertainment
Damage
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels
or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered U.S. pat-
ents and the intellectual property of the Macro-
vision Corporation and other manufacturers.
The use of this copy protection must be
approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise
agreed with Macrovision, media with this pro-
tection may only be used for private purposes.
Copying of this technology is prohibited.
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured under license of US
patent numbers: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other patents granted and pending in both the
USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg-
istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. ©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
172
Entertainment Music collection
Music collection
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Storing music
The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB
devices can be stored in the music collection in
the vehicle and played from there.
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com-
pressed audio format when they are stored.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi-
cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Files
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, M4A, and
AAC formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored in the vehicle but cannot be played
back.
Regularly back up the music data; other-
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on
the hard disc.<
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry
standard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may prac-
tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
5.987.525, 6.061.680, 6.154.773, 6.161.132,
6.230.192, 6.230.207, 6.240.459 and
6.330.593 as well as other granted or pending
patents. Some services supplied under license
from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
6.304.523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-
marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and
logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote"
logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Storing files from CDs/DVDs
CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/DVD
player.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed.
The tracks are stored and played back in
sequence from the music collection.
Observe the following during the storage
process:
Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
player; otherwise, the storage process will be
interrupted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
173
Music collection
Entertainment
You can switch to the other audio sources with-
out interrupting the storage process. Tracks
from the current CD/DVD can also be called up,
if they have been stored already.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue storing"
The storing of the CD/DVD continues at the
beginning of the track at which storing was
interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor-
mation is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be
connected to the USB interface in the glove
compartment.
> Suitable devices: USB mass storage
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3
players with a USB interface.
> Unsuitable devices: USB hard drive, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with multi-
ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.
Music from Apple iPods/iPhones can be
played via the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
> File systems: popular file systems for USB
devices are supported. The format FAT 32
is recommended.
Music from a USB device can be stored
only via the USB interface in the glove
compartment.<
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
174
Entertainment Music collection
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
4. Select the desired category.
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired input.
or
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is automatically repeated.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search by voice
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
To select a track directly:
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in one command.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
2. {Music search}
3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select
artist}.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
{Title …}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
175
Music collection
Entertainment
Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if
needed. To go up one level in the directory,
move the controller to the left.
Random sequence playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat-
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown, it can be changed later.
An album cannot be renamed while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
176
Entertainment Music collection
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from it
is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
it is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup
during a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 115.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Restoring the music collection in the
vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the
music collection existing in the vehicle is
replaced.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
177
External devices
Entertainment
External devices
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
AUX-IN port
Overview
> It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.
MP3 players. Sound is output over the
vehicle speakers.
> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and
volume settings on the audio device. Tone
may depend on the quality of the audio files.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
The AUX-In connection is in the center armrest
Connect the headphone connection or line-out
connection of the device to the jack plug.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on, and
using the audio device, select a track.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices" if applicable
4. "AUX front"
Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting volume
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" if applicable
3. "AUX front"
Symbol Meaning
AUX-In connection
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
178
Entertainment External devices
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and then press the controller.
USB audio interface/Music
interface for smartphones
Overview
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is out-
put over the vehicle speakers.
Options for connecting external
devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player,
USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are
supported by the USB audio interface.
> Connection via snap-in adapter if the vehi-
cle is equipped with a music interface for
smartphones: Apple iPhone or mobile
phones. Playback may only be possible
when no device is connected to the AUX-IN
port.
Because of the large number of audio devices
available on the market, an operation via the
vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio
device/mobile phone.
Ask your BMW center for suitable audio
devices/mobile phones.
File systems
Popular file systems for USB devices are sup-
ported. The format FAT 32 is recommended.
Audio files
Playback of standard audio files is possible:
> MP3
> WMA
> WAV (PCM)
> AAC, M4A
> Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS
Connection via the USB audio interface
Lift up the center armrest.
1 AUX-IN port for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Apple iPod/iPhone
Use a flexible adapter cable for the connection.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB
interface 2.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is
supported by the USB audio interface.
USB device
To protect the USB interface and USB device
from mechanical damage, connect them with a
flexible adapter cable.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface 2.
After initial connection
Information about all tracks, e.g. artist or music
style and the playlists are imported into the
vehicle. It can take some time, depending on
the USB device and the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be
accessed via the file directory.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
179
External devices
Entertainment
Number of tracks
The data from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the
vehicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more
than 36,000 tracks are stored, then the data of
existing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
Playback begins with the first track.
The CD cover that belongs to the track appears
on the Control Display, possibly after a few
seconds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
> Playback lists
> Information: music style, artist; if applicable,
composer, album, track.
> Additionally for USB devices: file directory;
if applicable, composer.
Track titles are displayed if they have been
stored in the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Search"
5. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre",
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired input. When a letter is entered,
the results are filtered using this letter as
the first letter. If multiple letters are
entered, all results that contain that
sequence are displayed.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis-
played.
7. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
To open playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
180
Entertainment External devices
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence
The current list of tracks is played in random
sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback
Overview
Video playback possible via snap-in adapter.
They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is
output over the vehicle speakers.
Playback
For your own safety, the video image is only dis-
played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some
market-specific versions, only with the parking
brake engaged or the selector lever of the auto-
matic transmission is in the park position.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Video"
5. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin
playback.
Video menu
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme
environmental conditions, e.g. very high tem-
peratures, refer to the operating instructions of
the audio device.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
Information on connection
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a max. power of 500 mA if supported
by the device. For this reason, do not con-
nect the device to a charging socket in the
vehicle; otherwise, it may not be possible to
ensure proper playback.
> Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.
Bluetooth audio
Overview
> It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music
files from external devices, e.g. audio
devices or mobile phones.
Using a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 178.
> Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
Symbol Format
Next video file
Previous video file
It may be necessary to click the
symbol twice in order to play the
previous video file.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
181
External devices
Entertainment
> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
> The volume of the sound output depends
on the device. If necessary, change the
volume setting on the device.
> Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
> Suitable device. For information, go to
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
> Device operational.
> Ignition switched on.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 189, and in the device.
> Activating Bluetooth audio, refer to
page 189.
> Bluetooth presets in the device are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
device.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the
Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for
pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
to endangerment of passengers or other road
users.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is
displayed.
5. To perform other operations on the device,
refer to the owner's manual for the device:
e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth
device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device's display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device's display.
You will be prompted by iDrive or the device
to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".
9. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the device is
displayed as connected.
symbol displayed in white: device is active
as an audio source.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if…,
refer to page 183.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
182
Entertainment External devices
Connecting a particular device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connection is not possible if a data exchange is
currently taking place via a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
Prerequisite
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired
devices.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Connecting a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
symbol displayed in white: device is active
as an audio source.
Playback
General information
> The display of track information depends on
the device.
> Operation via the device or iDrive are both
possible.
> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange is
taking place with a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1. Connect device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired title from the list.
Playback menu
Depending on the device, all functions may not
be available.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
183
External devices
Entertainment
Disconnecting an audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Select the desired device from the list of
connected devices.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
With a mobile phone, only the audio connection
is disconnected. All other connections remain
active.
Unpairing device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
Information about suitable devices is available
at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 188.
> Device not supported by vehicle.
If necessary, perform a software update,
refer to page 184.
> Device could not be paired or connected.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey
on the device and via iDrive.
Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary,
delete the connections with other devices.
Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
Is the device no longer responding? Switch
the device off and back on again.
Repeat the pairing procedure.
> No music can be played.
Start the program for playing music files on
the device and if necessary, select a track
via the device.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
> Music files only play quietly.
Adjust volume settings on the device.
> Playback is interrupted by the press of a
button or other messages on the device.
Switch off key tones and other acoustic
signal on the device.
> Playback is interrupted by a phone call or
traffic report and does not automatically
continue.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
> Playback is not possible when the mobile
phone is connected via Bluetooth audio and
at the same time via the extended connec-
tivity of the music player in the mobile
phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
184
Entertainment External devices
Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g.
the audio connection, refer to page 183,
and start playback again.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function, please
contact Customer Relations or your BMW
center.
Software update
The vehicle supports various external devices,
depending on the software it is currently using.
A software update can enable the vehicle to
support, for example, new mobile phones or
new external devices.
Software updates and associated, up-to-date
instructions are available on the web page
www.bmwusa.com/update.
Displaying current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
Select the desired version to display additional
information.
Updating software by USB
The software update can only be performed
when stopped.
1. Save the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB data storage
device.
2. Connect the USB data storage device to the
USB audio interface in the center armrest. It
is not possible to perform the update using
the USB interface in the glove compart-
ment.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All of the listed software updates are installed.
Restoring to previous version
The software version can be restored to before
the last software update.
The restoring to the previous version can only
be performed when stopped.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. Select "OK" twice.
All of the listed software updates are removed.
Note
BMW Assist, Office functions, and connected
devices may be temporarily unavailable during a
software update or while restoring to the
previous version. Wait a few minutes until the
functions are available once more.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
185
External devices
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
This chapter describes how to use the
telephone, BMW Assist and BMW TeleService.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
188
Communications Te le p h o n e
Telephone
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g.
audio players, can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
After being paired once, when the ignition is
switched on, these devices are automatically
detected as soon as they are present in the
vehicle and can be controlled via iDrive, by the
buttons on the steering wheel, and by voice.
Depending on whether they are functioning as a
telephone and/or as an audio source, external
devices can be used via the vehicle. The tele-
phone functions will be described below. Oper-
ation of audio functions, refer to page 180.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
It may be necessary for some functions to be
activated by the mobile phone provider or
service provider.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the hands-
free system instead. Otherwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter makes it possible:
> Accommodate the mobile phone.
> Recharge its battery.
> Connect it to an external antenna of the
vehicle.
This assures a better network connection
and constant sound quality.
Suitable mobile phones
For precise information about which mobile
phones and external devices with a Bluetooth
interface are supported by the mobile phone
preparation, go to www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Displaying vehicle identification
number and software part number
Checking which mobile phones are supported
by the mobile phone preparation requires the
vehicle identification number and software part
number. The software version of the mobile
phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
With a certain software version, these suitable
mobile phones support the vehicle functions
described below.
With other mobile phones or software versions,
malfunctions may occur.
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
It is possible to perform a software update, refer
to page 184.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
189
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer be carried out.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
follow the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Pairing/unpairing mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
> Using a mobile phone as a telephone.
> Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary
phone.
> Using the mobile phone as an audio source.
> Using an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 180.
Requirements
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 188.
> Mobile phone operational.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 191, and in the mobile phone.
> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone.
> Deactivating Bluetooth audio, refer to
page 189.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the
Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for
pairing.
> Ignition switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Additional functions
Auxiliary phone
A mobile phone can be used as an auxiliary
phone.
Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be
accepted, refer to page 193. Missed calls to the
auxiliary phone are shown in the Control
Display.
Office
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages, and e-mails are imported from the
mobile phone into the vehicle.
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Activating/deactivating additional
functions
To use these functions in the vehicle, activate
them before pairing. For information on suitable
mobile phones that support these functions,
refer to page 188.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
190
Communications Te le p h o n e
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. Select the desired additional function:
> "Additional telephone"
> "Office"
> "Bluetooth® audio"
If an additional function is deactivated, it cannot
be assigned to a phone.
Pairing and connecting a device
Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
to endangerment of passengers or other road
users.<
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is
displayed.
4. To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the owner's manual for the
device: e.g. search for and connect
Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
6. You will be prompted by iDrive or the mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth
passkey.
Enter the passkey and confirm.
or
Compare the control number in the vehi-
cle's display to the control number of the
mobile phone. Confirm the control number
in the mobile phone and in the vehicle.
"OK"
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of devices.
Functions supported by the mobile phone and
audio device are displayed as symbols during
the pairing.
White symbol: function active.
Gray symbol: function inactive.
Four devices can be paired with the vehicle
simultaneously. Three devices can be con-
nected to the vehicle simultaneously.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if…,
refer to page 192.
Symbol Function
Telephone
Auxiliary phone
Audio source
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
191
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The phone book entries of the telephone
that are stored on the SIM card or the
mobile phone are imported into the vehicle
once the device is detected, depending on
the mobile phone.
> Four devices can be paired.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the Owner's
Manual for the mobile phone.
Connecting a particular device
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired devices are listed.
3. Select the device to be connected.
The functions assigned before the unpairing of
the device are assigned to the device when it is
reconnected. If a device is already connected,
then these functions are deactivated if
necessary.
Configuring devices
Additional functions can be activated or
deactivated in paired and connected devices.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the device to be configured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. Select the desired functions. At least one
function must be selected.
> "Telephone"
> "Additional telephone"
> "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a device is assigned a function, this may deac-
tivate the function in an already connected
device and cause the other device to be
unpaired.
Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary
phone
If the telephone and auxiliary phone are con-
nected to the vehicle, the function can be
swapped between the two devices.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing device
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired devices are listed.
3. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
192
Communications Te le p h o n e
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones,
refer to page 188.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con-
nected.
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the audio connection activated? Deacti-
vate the audio connection.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
> Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Is the ambient temperature too high or too
low? Do not subject your mobile phone to
extreme ambient temperatures.
Telephone functions not possible.
> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary
phone and is the auxiliary phone function
deactivated? Activate the function.
> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the
mobile phone as a telephone.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
> In some cases, only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card will be
transferred.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
> The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
> The data volume of the phone book entry is
too great, e.g. due to additionally stored
information such as notes? Reduce the data
volume.
> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or auxiliary phone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The telephone connection quality is low.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi-
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal.
> Insert the mo
bile ph
one into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the vicinity of the
center console.
> Adjust the volume of the microphone and
speaker separately.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function, please
check the website www.bmw.com/bluetooth
for further notes or contact Customer Relations
or a BMW center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
193
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Operation
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the mobile phone and the
volume of the person on the phone with you.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may be
necessary to adjust the volumes.
Adjustments are only possible during a call and
must be carried out separately for each phone.
When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes
the settings.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. To select the desired setting:
"Microphone" or "Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, then
the name and number of the contact are
displayed; otherwise, only the number is
displayed.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
number, then only the name of the caller is
displayed.
With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the
number is displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to a phone is automatically
rejected if a call on the other phone is currently
active.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is connected to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "End call"
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
194
Communications Te le p h o n e
Entering phone numbers
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
It is also possible to enter phone numbers by
voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
It is possible to switch between two calls or to
connect two calls to establish a conference call.
These functions must be supported by the
mobile phone and by the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be set for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is continued.
Switching between two calls, toggling
Active call: highlighted.
The call on hold is identified with:
"on hold...".
"Swap calls"
The phone switches to the call on hold.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
195
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single
telephone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Muting the microphone
The microphone can be muted in active calls.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
The muted microphone is automatically
activated:
> If a new call is made.
> When switching between callers on hold.
Keypad dialing
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely
access an answering machine. This requires
the DTMF code.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select contact from a list or "Dial number"
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter a DTMF code.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts of the
telephone and shows all contacts for which a
phone number is entered. The entries can be
selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 202.
Calling a contact
Contacts with a stored phone number: select
the desired contact. The connection is
established.
Contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the desired contact and then
select the phone number. The connection is
established.
Symbol Meaning
Contact with a stored phone number.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible. The mobile phone
has no reception or network or a Ser-
vice Request is currently active.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
196
Communications Te le p h o n e
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
are transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. In some cases, only numbers
that were dialed from the vehicle are displayed.
The last 20 phone numbers dialed are dis-
played. The sorting of the phone numbers
depends on the mobile phone.
Dialing the number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and phone number,
if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls in the mobile phone is
transferred into the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. In some cases, only calls that
were received in the vehicle are displayed.
The last 20 calls received are displayed. The
sorting and displaying of phone numbers
depends on the mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
197
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can be continued using the mobile
phone and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the dis-
play of the mobile phone, also refer to the
Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Operation by voice
With voice activation system:
Operation, refer to page 27.
Without voice activation system:
Depending upon the equipment, the mobile
phone can be voice-operated as described
below.
The list of short commands in the Owner's
Manual does not apply to this type of voice
operation.
The concept
> The mobile phone can be operated without
removing your hand from the steering
wheel.
> In many cases, the entry process is sup-
ported by means of announcements or
questions.
> {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
operation system.
Voice commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
Finishing voice input
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
Possible commands are read aloud.
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
198
Communications Te le p h o n e
Each digit can be spoken individually or com-
bined into a sequence to accelerate the entry
process.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Example: dialing phone numbers
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. {Dial number}
The system replies: {{Please say the
number}}.
3. For example: {123 456 7890}
The system replies: {{123 456 7890.
Continue?}}.
4. {Dial}
The system replies: {{Dialing number}}.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
Digit sequences can be deleted after the
system has repeated the digits.
The command can be repeated as often as
necessary.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Redialing
Voice phone book
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice com-
mands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Storing the entry
Deleting the entry
Deleting all entries
Reading and selecting the entries
Selecting an entry
{Select name} or {Name}.
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
{Delete}.
{Redial}.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a
speaking duration of about 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. {Save number}.
1. {Delete name}.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm request: {Yes}
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm request: {Yes}
3. Confirm request again: {Yes}
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry
is read aloud.
1. {Select name}.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm request: {Yes}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
199
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Adjusting volume
Turn knob during announcement.
> The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Notes on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice operation system to ini-
tiate an emergency call. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tele-
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 250,
in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha-
sis and speed.
> Always say the commands in the language
of the system. The language of the voice
operation of the mobile phone is preset and
cannot be changed via the Control Display.
> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof, and
convertible top closed to prevent interfer-
ence from outside noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Snap-in adapter
General information
Detailed information on snap-in adapters that
compatibly support mobile phone functions can
be found at your BMW center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer be carried out.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
follow the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Installation location
In the center armrest.
Inserting snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front,
arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until
it clicks into place.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
200
Communications Te le p h o n e
Inserting mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be
necessary to remove the protective cap of
the antenna connector and from the USB
connection of the mobile phone.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
Removing mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
201
Office
Communications
Office
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages and mobile phone e-mails can be
displayed using the Control Display if the
mobile phone compatibly supports these func-
tions and the required Bluetooth radio stan-
dards.
For information about which mobile phones and
functions support the functions of Office, go to
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
A limited number of compatible mobile phones
are available for Office.
Contents are only displayed completely when
the vehicle is stopped.
Only read access to the mobile phone is
possible.
Do not use Office while driving. Make
entries only when traffic and road condi-
tions permit; otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by
being distracted.<
Requirements
> A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, the data access to the mobile
phone must be confirmed.
> Time zone, time, and date, refer to page 82,
are correctly set on the Control Display and
on the mobile phone in order, for example,
to correctly display appointments.
> Office is activated, refer to page 189.
Updating
Every time that the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle, data are updated. Appointments,
tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Data from the mobile phone are again
transferred to the vehicle.
Current office
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as upcoming appointments are
displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Selecting the desired entry to display
details.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
202
Communications Office
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The con-
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be used as destina-
tions for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.
Displaying contacts
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
If a contact is changed, the changes are not
stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is
displayed.
Selecting a contact as a destination
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
With contacts from the mobile phone, the
address must be compared with the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another des-
tination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has
not been checked as a destina-
tion.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
203
Office
Communications
If the address is corrected and stored, then a
copy is established in the vehicle. The address
is not changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone
numbers, 2 addresses, 3 email addresses, and
one Internet address.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "New contact"
5. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
7. Enter text and assign a contact type.
8. When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that route guidance is possible for all
addresses.
9. "Accept address" if necessary
10. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Phone numbers and addresses can be
assigned various contact types.
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting name sorting
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts are stored in
your mobile phone, the sorting of names can
differ from the sorting selected.
Displaying contact pictures
Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the
vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to
the vehicle. The mobile phone must support
this function.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
Symbol Meaning
Private phone number
Business phone number
Mobile phone number
Other phone number
Private address
Business address
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
204
Communications Office
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
The display of all contact pictures is activated or
deactivated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. "Options"
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Messages
General information
The displaying of text messages and emails
from the mobile phone depends on whether the
mobile phone supports transmission into the
vehicle from the mobile phone. Text messages
and e-mails may not be supported by the ser-
vice provider or the function may have to be
separately activated. After a mobile phone is
paired for the first time, the transmission may
take several minutes. Messages are only dis-
played completely when the vehicle is stopped.
Messages from the auxiliary phone are not
transmitted.
To display various messages:
> Text messages.
> Messages from My info.
> Messages from the BMW Concierge
service.
> Messages from BMW Info.
> Emails from the mobile phone.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
Message type
A symbol indicates the type of message.
Read message.
Unread message.
Filtering message lists
A message list can be filtered if there is more
than one message type.
1. "Filter:"
2. Select the message type.
> "All"
All messages are displayed.
> "E-mail"
Only text messages from mobile phones
are displayed.
> "Services messages"
Only messages from the BMW Con-
cierge service, My Info, and BMW Info
are displayed.
> "Text message"
Only text messages from mobile phones
are displayed.
Symbol Message type
Text message
My Info
Message from the Concierge
service, refer to page 213
Messages from BMW Info, refer
to page 206
E-mail from mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
205
Office
Communications
Deleting messages
Messages from the Concierge service, My Info,
BMW Info, and BMW Online can be deleted.
To delete a message:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
4. Open "Options".
5. Open "Delete message".
To delete all messages:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all messages"
Text message
Calling a text message sender
1. Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving sender in the contacts
1. Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes-
sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 208.
Reading text messages aloud
Having text messages read aloud, refer to
page 209.
My Info
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a
message is selected.
Messages from the Concierge service
Saving an address
1. Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a
message is selected.
Symbol Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number, a
telephone connection is estab-
lished.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. A telephone
connection is established.
Symbol Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number, a
telephone connection is estab-
lished.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
206
Communications Office
BMW Info
General information
Messages from BMW about technical
campaigns and news from BMW.
Displaying messages
Select the desired message.
Selecting additional functions
The following functions are available when a
message is selected:
E-mail
Displaying e-mail
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and receiver of an e-mail were
transmitted from a mobile phone, they will be
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail address is stored in the contacts,
then the contact is displayed. Select contact to
display details.
If the e-mail address is not stored in the
contacts, then it may be that only the e-mail
address is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes-
sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 208.
Deactivating entire display
When opening an e-mail when in the vehicle, it
is completely transferred to the vehicle. This
may result in charges.
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. A telephone
connection is established.
"Further information"
Displaying additional information.
Symbol Function
"Further information"
Detailed information about a mes-
sage is displayed. This does not
incur any costs.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Symbol Function
"Call"
If the message contains a number, a
telephone connection is estab-
lished.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. A telephone
connection is established.
Symbol Function
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
207
Office
Communications
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of an e-mail from a mobile phone
is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading e-mail
Reading e-mail, see page 209.
Calendar
Displaying calendar
Appointments from the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
Appointments of the current day are
displayed.
Selecting calendar day
1. Select date.
2. Select desired day or date.
> "Next day"
> "Date:"
> "Previous day"
> "Today"
Displaying appointment
1. Select the desired appointment.
2. To scroll through appointment, if
necessary:
> Turn the controller.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes-
sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 208.
Reading an appointment aloud
Reading an appointment aloud, refer to
page 209.
Tasks
Displaying task list
Display open tasks that must be completed
within the next 90 days.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting task list
1. Select the top line in the task list.
2. To select a sorting criterion:
> "Priority (!)"
> "Subject"
> "Due date"
Displaying task
1. Select the desired task.
2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:
> Turn the controller.
> Select the symbol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
208
Communications Office
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes-
sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 208.
Reading a task aloud
Reading a task aloud, refer to page 209.
Notes
Displaying notes
1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying a note
1. Select the desired note.
2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:
> Turn the controller.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 208.
Reading a note aloud
Reading a note aloud, refer to page 209.
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders for imminent appointments and
tasks are displayed. After an appointment has
passed or a task is due, the reminder is no
longer displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The associated appointment or task is
displayed.
Using contact data
Overview
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes-
sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected.
To display a contact or dial a phone
number
1. "Use contact data"
2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
> Select a contact to display a detailed
view of the contact.
> Select a phone number to directly
establish a connection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
209
Office
Communications
Storing contact data
1. "Use contact data"
2. Highlight a phone number or e-mail
address.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading aloud
Text messages, emails, appointments, tasks,
and notes can be read aloud.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
While the message is being read aloud, you
have the following options:
> "Pause"
Interrupt the reading. Select again to
resume the reading.
> "Back to beginning"
Read message again from the beginning.
> Select the symbol.
Skip back one paragraph.
> Select the symbol.
Skip over a paragraph.
> To terminate the reading, move the control-
ler toward the left.
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones,
refer to page 188.
> Appointments, tasks, notes, texts, or emails
from the mobile phone are not displayed?
The mobile phone is not suitable for the
missing function or is not correctly
connected.
The mobile phone has not been assigned
the Office function.
The mobile phone is connected as an auxil-
iary phone.
The appointments are older than 20 days
and are more than 50 days in the future.
The tasks have been marked as completed
or are more than 90 days in the future.
Depending on the number of appointments,
tasks, notes, and messages stored in the
mobile phone, not all of them are displayed
in the vehicle.
> Appointments or tasks from the mobile
phone are not being displayed at the correct
time?
The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly
set in the Control Display and in the mobile
phone.
> Texts of entries are not displayed
completely?
Texts are already shortened by the mobile
phone.
Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle can take a few minutes.
> Contact pictures are not being displayed?
Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be
stored in the vehicle.
> If you have gone through all items in the list
and still cannot activate the desired func-
tion please contact Customer Relations or a
BMW center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
210
Communications Contacts
Contacts
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Note
In equipment packages without mobile phone
preparation.
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The
addresses can be used as destinations for
navigation.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
5. Entering text, refer to page 25.
When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that route guidance is possible for all
addresses.
6. "Store" if necessary
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts that are stored in the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
211
Contacts
Communications
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
Selecting a contact as a destination
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Selecting name sorting
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported using
Personal Profile, refer to page 32.
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has
not been checked as a destina-
tion.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
212
Communications ConnectedDrive
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
BMW Assist
General information
BMW Assist provides a number of different ser-
vices. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency Request
is sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the
contract individually agreed upon.
After the contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without you having to visit a
BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has
been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will
be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a BMW center after a new
contract has been signed.
Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
into a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the
services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine its current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your BMW center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. The service
must have been fully enabled.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
> Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic Emergency Request: under cer-
tain conditions, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established after
a serious accident. If possible, the BMW
Assist Response Center then speaks with
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
call.
> Customer Relations: connection to
Customer Relations for information on all
aspects of your vehicle.
> BMW TeleService: the data on your vehi-
cle's service status or required inspections
are transmitted to your BMW center, either
automatically before a service due date or
when you request a service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist
Response Center provides assistance if, for
example, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to
the police that your vehicle was stolen, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter-
mine its position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
213
ConnectedDrive
Communications
> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan
offers Concierge service and information on
route planning, the traffic situation and
weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited
number of calls can be made via the BMW
Assist Response Center, for example if the
mobile phone is not available or discharged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
TeleService
General information
TeleService supports communication with your
BMW center.
> Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In
this way, the BMW center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of
the service appointment.
> In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
> The service varies by country.
> Connection may incur charges.
> Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Wireless reception is available.
> Ignition switched on.
Using TeleService
Generally, TeleService is activated in the
vehicle.
If TeleService is not activated, it is possible to
establish a voice contact to the BMW Group
Mobile Service.
For additional uses or to deactivate the ser-
vices, consult your BMW center or contact
Customer Relations.
Concierge service
General information
The Concierge service of BMW Assist will
inform you, for example, about upcoming
events, filling station, or hotels and supplies you
with their phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly through the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Use of the Concierge
service requires an additional activation by the
BMW Assist Response Center.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice contact with the BMW Concierge
service is established. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted as a message.
Messages
Information about messages, refer to page 204.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break-
down.
Contact with BMW Roadside Assistance can
also be established using a Check Control
message, refer to page 84.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
214
Communications ConnectedDrive
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
without BMW Assist or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis-
played. If a mobile phone is paired, a con-
nection to BMW Roadside Assistance is
established.
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
with BMW Assist or TeleService
In a vehicle with TeleService, assistance is first
offered through the TeleService Diagnosis and
then if necessary, through the TeleService
Help.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
BMW TeleService Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
critical to vehicle diagnosis. These data are
automatically transmitted.
After transmission of the data, a voice connec-
tion is established to Roadside Assistance.
BMW Online
Overview
You can use BMW Online to search the yellow
pages.
License conditions:
This product contains NetFront Browser soft-
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS Co., Ltd., in Japan and other
countries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
> Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless
network coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
Starting BMW Online
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
3. "OK" if necessary
The BMW Online start page is displayed.
Using BMW Online
To select and display content:
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
> Press the controller to display an element.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
215
ConnectedDrive
Communications
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Canceling
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
Overview
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis-
played. If a mobile phone is paired, a connection
is established to Customer Relations.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Service Request
Overview
Inform your BMW center that you need to
schedule a service appointment. The Teleser-
vice data is transmitted during a Service
Request. If possible, your BMW center will
establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Automatic Service Request
The Teleservice data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
center prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the center will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
Check when your BMW center was notified.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
216
Communications ConnectedDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Service status
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist
Manually updating BMW TeleService, BMW
Assist, and BMW Online.
"Update BMW Assist"
Data transfer
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Apps
Overview
Certain software applications of a suitable
mobile phone can be integrated into the vehicle.
These software applications are displayed on
the Control Display. They can be operated via
iDrive.
Requirements
> The mobile phone's operating system
supports the use of apps.
> Software applications are installed on the
mobile phone and are operational.
> Suitable mobile phone.
> Appropriate mobile phone contract.
Additional costs possibly incurred are not
included in the price of apps.
Information about suitable mobile phones,
available software applications, and their instal-
lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec-
tivity or at your BMW center.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by
being distracted.
For safety reasons, some software applications
can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<
To avoid malfunctions, only use software
applications approved by BMW.<
Using apps
1. Connect the mobile phone using the snap-
in adapter or the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
217
ConnectedDrive
Communications
Displaying status
You can display information about the currently
available software applications.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
Plugin
Selected functions of the mobile phone are
displayed on the Control Display. They can be
operated via iDrive.
1. Connect the mobile phone using the snap-
in adapter.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Use the controller to navigate in the dis-
played functions and select the desired
category or track, for example.
Press the button to move one level up or
back within the functions of the mobile
phone.
Press the button twice to return back to
the main menu.
Notes
> The range of apps that are displayed in the
Control Display depends on the range of
software applications installed on the
mobile phone.
> The data transfer of the software applica-
tions from the mobile phone to the vehicle
may take some time. Some software appli-
cations are dependent on the speed of the
available Internet connection of the mobile
phone.
> Certain versions of the mobile phone used
and the software they use may not permit
apps to be used at the same time as the
Bluetooth hands-free system.
If necessary, restart the software applica-
tion on the mobile phone after completing a
call.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
Roadside Assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
220
Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
General information
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler flap
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly
press the rear edge.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes-
sage will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or
missing.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
221
Refueling
Mobility
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler flap manually:
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand
sidewall of the trunk.
2. Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol
down.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Observe the following when refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> Premature pump shutoff
> Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor
recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,
fuel spills can cause damage to the
environment and the vehicle.<
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 14 US gal/53 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Fuel recommendations
Gasoline
For optimum fuel consumption, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or as low in sulfur as
possible.
Never use fuels labeled at the fuel pump as
metal-containing.
Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metallic additives such as manga-
nese or iron; doing so can cause permanent
damage to the catalytic converter and other
components.<
Use fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 Ξ, i.e. E10.
The ethanol should meet the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806-xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx
xx: comply with the currently valid standard.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con-
taining 85Ξ ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.
Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system
will be damaged.<
Fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
222
Mobility Refueling
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Do not use gasoline below the indicated
minimum fuel grade; otherwise, proper
engine function is not ensured.<
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage.
Additionally, problems relating to drivability,
starting and stalling may occur, especially
under certain environmental conditions such as
high ambient temperature and high altitude.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec-
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number
— for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine
deposits, we highly recommend purchasing
gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte-
nance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
223
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-
tion that can not only compromise your vehi-
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive
with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using
run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 93, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 91.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire
inflation pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
224
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
225
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 128i
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 135i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/psi
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/psi with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S A/S RSC
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.9/42
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V RSC 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V RSC - 2.4/35 - 3.0/44
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.2/32 - 2.4/35 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/psi
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/psi with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S A/S RSC
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC
2.3/33 2.5/36 2.6/38 2.9/42
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.5/36 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
226
Mobility Wheels and tires
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 128i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/psi
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/psi with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sport Package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S A/S RSC
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.4/35 2.2/32 2.7/39
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S A/S RSC
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V RSC 2.2/32 - 2.4/35 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V RSC - 2.5/36 - 2.8/41
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.4/35 - 2.4/35 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.8/41 - 2.8/41
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
with Sport Package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.2/32 2.7/39
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V RSC 2.2/32 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V RSC - 2.5/36 - 3.2/46
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.8/41 - 3.1/45
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
227
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 135i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/psi
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/psi with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sport Package
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S A/S RSC
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.6/38 2.5/36 2.9/42
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.7/39 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.8/41 - 2.8/41
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
with Sport Package
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.5/36 2.9/42
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.7/39 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.8/41 - 3.1/45
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
228
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 1013 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2013.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio
in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
225/45 R 1791 V
e.g.
Manufacturer's
code for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 4012
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
229
Wheels and tires
Mobility
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 230.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than
summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and sus-
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed,
especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
230
Mobility Wheels and tires
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire dealer. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Tire age
For various reasons, such as the development
of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace-
ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of
the actual wear of the tires.
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT ... 1013 means that the tire was manufac-
tured in week 10 of 2013.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires mounted only
by your BMW center or by a tire dealer. If
this work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels
are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten-
tially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot guarantee their driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire
combination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or
FTM.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been
damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire
combination again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise,
the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to
detect a puncture, refer to page 94. Your BMW
center will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
231
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for driving on
winter roads or at temperatures below +457/
+76. Although all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-
weather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and
accidents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view.
Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center
can supply these labels.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes,
swapping wheels between the axles is not
permissible.
Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-
supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforce-
ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can
continue to be used subject to certain restric-
tions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 92.
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information. Snow chains must be
mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to
page 89.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
232
Mobility Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 235
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean-
ing system and window washer system,
refer to page 72
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 251
4 Fluid filler neck for engine oil, refer to
Adding engine oil, page 235
Hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are not familiar with the regulations to be
followed, have the necessary work on the vehi-
cle carried out only by your BMW center; if this
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
233
Engine compartment
Mobility
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment. Do
not open the engine hood before the engine has
cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Engine oil
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and operating conditions; for
example, the engine oil consumption is signifi-
cantly higher with a very sporty driving style.
For this reason, regularly check the oil level
after each time you refuel.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
For precise measurement and display of the oil
level, the engine must be at operating tempera-
ture, i.e. following at least 6.2 miles/10 km of
uninterrupted driving. You can have the oil level
displayed while you are driving, or while the
vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and
the engine is running.
Display in the instrument cluster
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol is shown in the display,
accompanied by the word "OIL".
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
234
Mobility Engine compartment
2. Press button 2.
The oil level is checked and the reading
displayed.
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is on the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 235.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
5 The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 237. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level OK"
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface and the engine
is running, and about 5 minutes while the
car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil below.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked.":
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
235
Engine compartment
Mobility
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately; otherwise, the excess oil may
lead to engine damage.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked.":
Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to
drive, note the recalculated remaining mile-
age until the next oil change service, refer to
Service requirements on page 80. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a
corresponding message is shown on the
Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, the engine could be
damaged.<
If the engine oil is too high, have the
vehicle checked immediately; failure to do
so may result in engine damage.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil grades to add
Do not use oil additives as this could
result in engine damage.<
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
to use one from the SAE viscosity classes
0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 or 5W-30; failure to
do so may result in malfunctions or engine
damage.<
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some oil grades may not be available in all
countries.
Approved oil grades
Additional information about approved oil
grades is available at your BMW center.
Alternative oil types
If approved oils are not available, you can add
quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of an oil
with one of the following specifications:
Oil change
Oil changes should only be performed by a
BMW center.
Coolant
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center about
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is
important to follow the instructions on the
containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when
disposing of coolant additives.<
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Gasoline engine
API SM or higher
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
236
Mobility Engine compartment
Coolant temperature
If the coolant and therefore the engine over-
heats, a warning lamp lights up. A message
appears on the Control Display.
Checking coolant level
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The level indicator 1 in the coolant filler
neck indicates the level of coolant. The
coolant level is correct when it is between
the arrows of the respective inscription on
the reservoir 2.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss
eliminated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
237
Maintenance
Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System advises you of
necessary maintenance measures and helps
you maintain the traffic and operating safety of
the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 80:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your dealership Service
Advisor can read out this data from the remote
control unit, and propose an optimized mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore give your
dealership Service Advisor the remote control
unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set
correctly, refer to page 84; otherwise, the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
238
Mobility Maintenance
Socket for Onboard
Diagnosis OBD
The socket for onboard diagnosis should
only be used by your BMW center or at a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel and by otherwise authorized personnel;
otherwise, use can result in malfunctioning of
the vehicle.<
Coupe:
Convertible:
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check-
ing components relevant to the composition of
the vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle is producing higher emis-
sions. The trip can be continued. Have
the car checked as soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain condi-
tions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the
engine. If this happens, you should reduce your
speed and visit your nearest BMW center as
soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can
quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-
related components, especially the catalytic
converter.
The warning lamp lights up if the fuel
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor-
rectly positioned and close it until it audibly
clicks.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
239
Care
Mobility
Care
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Washing the vehicle
Notes
When using steam cleaners or high-pres-
sure cleaning jets, make sure to maintain
a sufficient distance and stay below a maximum
temperature of 1407/606.
Too close a distance, too high a pressure, or too
high a temperature may cause damage or
preliminary damage that can then lead to long-
term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the steam
jet or high-pressure washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray the sensors, e.g. of the Park
Distance Control, for an extended period and
maintain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm from
them.<
Regularly remove foreign objects, e.g. leaves, in
the vicinity of the windshield when the hood is
open.
Wash the vehicle more frequently, particularly
in winter.
Heavy soiling and road salt can lead to vehicle
damage.
Automatic car washes
Notes
In car washes with high pressures and
nozzle positions, water may drip into the
vehicle around the windows.<
Please note the following:
> Give preference to car washes that use
cloth or soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
> Wheels and tires must not be damaged by
transport devices.
> Fold in exterior mirror, refer to page 55; oth-
erwise, they can be damaged due to the
width of the vehicle.
> Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 72,
to prevent undesired wiper operation.
> In the convertible, do not treat the top with
wax. Ensure that a program is available that
does not apply wax or is designed specifi-
cally for Convertibles.
> Move rear wiper into its wiper park position,
deactivate it, and protect it from damage.
Ask the car wash operator about suitable
protective measures.
> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g. spoil-
ers or phone antennas, if they could be
damaged.
> Unscrew the rod antenna.
> Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
Avoid car washes with guide rail heights
over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the
danger of damaging chassis parts.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
240
Mobility Care
Driving into an automatic car wash
Perform the following steps to ensure that the
vehicle can roll:
Manual transmission:
1. Shift into neutral.
2. Release parking brake, refer to page 63.
3. Switch off the engine.
4. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
Automatic transmission:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Shift selector lever into position N.
3. Release parking brake, refer to page 63.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Shift selector lever into position N.
3. Release parking brake, refer to page 63.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
The transmission is switched into position P:
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> If you remove the infrared remote control
from the ignition lock
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo and
rinse away with water.
Thaw ice with a de-icer and do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake discs can corrode.<
Remove residues on the windows completely in
order to prevent impaired vision due to smear
formation and to reduce wiper noise and wiper
blade wear.
Vehicle care
Care products
BMW recommends using BMW cleaning and
care products since they have been tested and
approved for this purpose.
Follow the instructions on the packaging.
When cleaning inside the vehicle, always
open the doors and windows. Only use prod-
ucts designed for cleaning vehicles. Cleaning
agents can contain substances that are danger-
ous or hazardous to your health.<
Vehicle paintwork
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
regions with elevated levels of air pollution or
natural contaminants such as tree sap or pollen
can impact vehicle paintwork. The frequency
and scope of car care should be adapted
accordingly.
Immediately remove particularly corrosive sub-
stances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird
droppings to prevent damage to the paintwork.
Leather care
Frequently remove dust from the leather using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, dust and road grit in the pores and
folds of the leather will otherwise have an abra-
sive effect, resulting in increased wear and
causing the leather surface to become brittle
prematurely.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
241
Care
Mobility
In order to prevent staining, e.g due to clothing,
clean the leather approximately every two
months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as it
shows dust and dirt more noticeably.
Use BMW Premium Leather Care since dirt and
grease will otherwise slowly affect the protec-
tive layer of the leather.
Suitable care products are available at your
BMW center.
Upholstery care
Regularly vacuum with a vacuum cleaner.
To remove severe spots such as beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber
cloth and suitable interior cleaners.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using a
sweeping motion. Avoid strong rubbing.
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Care of special parts
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning on the vehicle, use only neutral
rim cleaner with a pH value of 5 to 9. Do not use
coarse cleansers and do not use steam clean-
ers at temperatures greater than 1407/606.
Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Aggressive, acid-containing, or strongly alka-
line cleaning agents can destroy the protective
coating of nearby components such as the
brake discs.
Chrome look surfaces
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radia-
tor grill or door handles with copious quantities
of water and possibly a shampoo additive, par-
ticularly when roads are treated with deicing
salt.
Rubber parts
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care products on
rubber seals; otherwise, noise and damage
could occur.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts only
with a damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Plastic parts
These include:
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Roofliner
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Parts spray painted matte black
> Painted parts in the passenger
compartment
Use a microfibre cloth for cleaning.
Moisten the cloth slightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Do not use any cleaners that contain alco-
hol or solvents such as lacquer thinner,
cold cleaning agents, fuel, and the like; other-
wise, you may damage the surfaces.<
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Only clean with a mild soap solution in the
installed state.
Only reel in seat belts when they are dry.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
242
Mobility Care
Carpet and floor mats
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an
existing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Floor mats can be removed for the cleaning of
the passenger compartment.
When inserting the floor mats, secure them
again to prevent slippage.
When carpets are heavily soiled, clean with a
microfibre cloth and water or textile cleaner.
When doing so, rub back and forth in the direc-
tion of travel; otherwise, the carpet may
become matted.
Sensors/cameras
Use a microfibre cloth moistened with some
glass cleaner for cleaning sensors or cameras.
Displays/screens
Use an antistatic microfibre cloth for cleaning
displays.
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid and moisture away from the device. Other-
wise, surfaces or electrical components may be
corroded or damaged. When cleaning, avoid
excessive pressure and do not use abrasive
materials; otherwise, you may damage them.<
Convertible top care
The appearance and service life of the convert-
ible top largely depends on its proper care and
operation.
Please follow these instructions:
> Never attempt to fold and stow the convert-
ible top in the convertible compartment
when the top is wet or frozen. Otherwise,
water stains, mildew, and chafe marks may
occur.
> If water spots occur on the inside headliner
despite precautions, remove them using a
microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
> If the vehicle is parked in an enclosed area
for a longer period of time, make sure that
there is sufficient ventilation.
> Remove any bird droppings immediately,
since they have corrosive properties which
will corrode the convertible top and damage
the rubber seals.
To remove stains from the convertible
top, do not use stain removers, paint thin-
ners, solvents, benzine or similar substances.
These cleaners may damage the rubber seals.
The improper care or cleaning methods may
cause the convertible top and its seams to
leak.<
To remove heavy soiling, use a special convert-
ible top cleaner.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
After washing the convertible top three to five
times, treat it with an impregnating agent.
Vehicle storage
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
preparatory steps for parking the vehicle for
more than three months.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
243
Replacing components
Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored below the
floor mat in the trunk.
Wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech-
anism, pulling the blade toward the front.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-
ing your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
Replacement bulb sets are available at your
BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch; otherwise, you could suffer
burns.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
To replace lamps not described here,
please contact your BMW center.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light sources for many
of the controls and displays in your vehicle.
These light-emitting diodes, which operate
using a concept similar to that applied in con-
ventional lasers, are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause
irritation of the retina.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
244
Mobility Replacing components
Headlight lenses
In cool or humid weather, condensation may
form on the interior of outside lamps. The con-
densation will disappear after a short time when
driving with the headlamps switched on. The
headlamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not defrost despite driving
with the headlamps switched on, and additional
moisture builds up, for example water droplets
in the lamps, have them checked by your BMW
center.
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never-
theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue
the journey with great care, provided that local
legislation does not prohibit this.
Have all work on the xenon lamp system
performed only by your BMW center. Due
to high voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if
work on the xenon lamps is carried out
improperly.<
Removing the headlamp cover
1. Pull the wire brackets over the notches, see
arrows, and fold to the side.
2. Fold away the headlamp cover.
Be careful when attaching the headlamp
cover and ensure that both wire brackets
are securely in place; otherwise, leaks could
occur and cause damage to the headlamp
system.<
Attach the headlamp cover in reverse order.
Halogen headlamps
Halogen low beams and high beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
Always wear gloves and eye protection;
the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is
pressurized. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if
the bulb is damaged.<
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1 High beams
2 Low-beam headlamps
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
2. Disconnect the plug from the lamp.
3. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the
mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down,
arrow 2.
4. Remove the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb with the notch at the top.
6. Fold up the wire bracket and engage it.
7. Connect the plug.
8. Attach the headlamp cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
245
Replacing components
Mobility
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps
W5W bulb, 5 watts
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
2. Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
4. Reinsert the bulb holder.
5. Attach the headlamp cover.
Xenon headlamps
Parking lamps, roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lights
H8 bulb, 35 watts
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
2. Turn the bulb, see arrow, and remove it.
3. Pull off the connector and replace the bulb.
4. Attach the connector, insert the bulb and
turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
5. Attach the headlamp cover.
Corner-illuminating lamps
H3 bulb, 55 watts
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1. Remove the top headlamp cover, using the
screwdriver to push the detent lugs to one
side.
2. Turn the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove it.
3. Slide the bulb out of the holder and pull off
the connector.
4. Replace the bulb and attach the connector.
5. Insert the bulb holder and turn it all the way
in the opposite direction.
6. Attach the headlamp cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
246
Mobility Replacing components
Turn signals, front
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover
in the wheel arch.
1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.
2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all
the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the
cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove
it, arrow 2.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.
5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning
it to the right.
6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom
edge first and then turning both locks all the
way to the right.
Side turn signals
W5W bulb, 5 watts
1. Press the rear edge of the lamp toward the
front with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it
out, arrow 2.
2. While simultaneously lifting the retaining
tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and
remove.
3. Remove lamp and replace it.
To install, insert front end of the lamp and press
into place at the back.
Tail lamps with halogen headlamps
> Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Backup lamp:
W16W bulb, 16 watts
> Brake lamps:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake Force Display lamp:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1 Inner brake lamp/tail lamp
2 Outer brake lamp/parking/tail lamp
3 Reflector
4 Lateral reflector
5 Turn signal
6 Backup lamp
7 Brake Force Display lamp/tail lamp
Tail lamps with xenon headlamps
> Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Backup lamp:
W16W bulb, 16 watts
> Brake lamps:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake Force Display lamp:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
247
Replacing components
Mobility
1 Roadside parking lamp and tail lamp LED
2 Inner brake lamp
3 Outer brake lamp
4 Reflector
5 Lateral reflector
6 Turn signal
7 Backup lamp
8 Brake Force Display lamp
Replacing tail lamps
Outer brake lamp
The outer brake lamp can be accessed through
a single socket.
The figure shows the right side of the vehicle.
1. Remove the cover from the panel of the
trunk.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left, see arrow,
and remove it.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.
4. Attach the bulb holder and turn it all the way
in the opposite direction.
5. Reattach the cover.
With Xenon headlamps, the parking/tail
lamp uses LED technology. After replac-
ing the bulb, ensure that the bulb holder is prop-
erly seated; otherwise, the roadside parking
lamp/tail lamp may not work.<
Inner brake lamp, turn signal, backup
lamp and Brake Force Display lamp
The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.
1. Remove the cover from the panel of the
trunk.
2. Detach the bulb holder by pressing
together the clips, see arrows, and remove
it.
3. Brake lamps and turn signal: apply gentle
pressure to the bulb while turning it to the
left for removal and replacement.
4. Backup lamp: pull the bulb out of the socket
and replace it.
5. Attach the bulb holder and let it snap into
place.
6. Reattach the cover.
License plate lamps, center brake
lamp, and parking/tail lamp
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
248
Mobility Replacing components
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as
standard. This eliminates the need to change a
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a
damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on
page 92.
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
New wheels and tires, page 230.
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer
also to New wheels and tires, page 230.
The tools for changing wheels are avail-
able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate
climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise
in all matters concerning the battery.
Battery replacing
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manu-
facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam-
aged and systems or functions may not be fully
available.<
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not connect battery chargers to the
sockets installed in the vehicle at the
factory; otherwise you may cause damage to
the battery.<
General information
To guarantee the full service life of the battery,
ensure that the battery is always properly
charged.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in the
following situations:
> If frequent short trips are taken;
> If the vehicle is frequently parked for more
than a month.
Jump-starting terminals
Charge the battery via the connections in the
engine compartment only when the engine is
off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on
page 251.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 82.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
249
Replacing components
Mobility
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 160.
> Navigation system
Wait for the system to start, refer to
page 151.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
tilted. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 54.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 114.
> Active steering
The system automatically initializes itself
briefly during a trip. The system is deacti-
vated during this time, refer to page 96.
Disposal of old battery
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or bring them to a recycling
center. Maintain the battery in an upright
position for transport and storage. Always
secure the battery against tipping over during
transport.<
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rating;
otherwise, this could lead to a circuit overload,
ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
In the glove compartment
Accessing the fuse box:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the damper, arrow 1, from the
lower holder by applying forward pressure.
3. Disengage the glove compartment by
pressing on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold it
down.
Plastic tweezers are located on the distributor
box.
Information on fuse assignment can be found
next to the distributor box.
Spare fuses are available at your BMW center.
After replacing a fuse, press the glove compart-
ment upward until it engages and reattach the
damper.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
250
Mobility Giving and receiving assistance
Giving and receiving assistance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Emergency Request
Requirements
> Full preparation package mobile phone: this
equipment makes it possible to send an
Emergency Request even if no mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged into a
mobile phone network that is supported by
BMW Assist.
> The Emergency Request system is
operable.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Subscriber contract
Upon expiration of the subscriber contract with
BMW Assist, the BMW Assist system can be
deactivated by a BMW center without a work-
shop visit.
After the system is deactivated, it is no longer
possible to make Emergency Requests.
It may be possible for a BMW center to reacti-
vate the system after a new contract has been
signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button comes on.
> The LED comes on: the Emergency
Request has been triggered.
If the circumstances allow, remain in the
vehicle until the voice contact has been
established.
> The LED flashes when the connection to
the BMW Assist Response Center has been
established.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center
has received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts
you and takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Assist Response Center will be able
to initiate further steps to assist you under
certain conditions.
Data for determining the necessary rescue
measures are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the
current position of your vehicle, if it can be
determined.
> If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. The
BMW Assist Response Center may still be
able to hear you, however.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
251
Giving and receiving assistance
Mobility
Automatically triggering an Emergency
Request
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. An automatic Emergency
Request is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance is available by
phone around the clock in many countries. You
can obtain support there in the event of a break-
down.
First aid pouch
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any items in good time, if
necessary.
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the trunk in a storage area.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the
trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.
Jump starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the
battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting
vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of shorting.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
252
Mobility Giving and receiving assistance
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order to prevent sparking at the battery,
which could cause injury.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 232. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting
connection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-
cle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or
negative pole.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and
regulations for tow-starting and towing
vehicles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
It is stored with the onboard vehicle tool kit
underneath the floor mat in the trunk, refer to
page 243.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
253
Giving and receiving assistance
Mobility
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the
tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Rectangular cover panel in bumper:
Press the arrow on the cover.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 61; otherwise, the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable. There is
no power assist while the engine is off. Thus,
braking and steering will require increased
effort. Active steering is not active and it will be
necessary to turn the steering wheel further.<
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever position, refer to
page 64.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/
70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Make sure that the parking lock P is not
engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are
immobilized.
When using the car wash function, refer to
page 240, make sure that after approx.
30 minutes, the parking lock P is automatically
engaged and thus immobilizes the rear wheels.
In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the
vehicle must be towed for more than approx.
20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually,
refer to page 69.<
When towing, do not exceed a maximum
speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maxi-
mum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; oth-
erwise, the transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise,
damage may result.<
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
254
Mobility Giving and receiving assistance
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck
Manual transmission and automatic
transmission:
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
ble; instead, jump start the engine, refer to
page 251. Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission or
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
completely depressed and then slowly
release the clutch. After the engine starts,
immediately depress the clutch completely
again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the
tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard
warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
255
Giving and receiving assistance
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system and
an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
258
Reference Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Dimensions
Coupe
Width with mirrors in/mm 75.6/1,919
Width without mirrors in/mm 68.8/1,748
Height
Height, 135i
in/mm
in/mm
56.0/1,423
55.4/1,408
Length in/mm 172.2/4,373
Wheelbase in/mm 104.7/2,660
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 35.1/10.7
Convertible
Width with mirrors in/mm 75.6/1,919
Width without mirrors in/mm 68.8/1,748
Height
Height, 135i
in/mm
in/mm
55.6/1,411
54.8/1,392
Length in/mm 172.2/4,373
Wheelbase in/mm 104.7/2,660
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 35.1/10.7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
259
Te c hn ic a l d at a
Reference
Weights
Coupe
Convertible
Capacities
128i 135i
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,134/1,875 4,255/1,930
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,211/1,910 –
> Sport automatic transmis-
sion with double clutch
lbs/kg – 4,321/1,960
Load lbs/kg 794/360 794/360
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,028/920 2,116/960
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040 2,293/1,040
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75
Trunk capacity cu ft/liters 13.1/370 13.1/370
128i 135i
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,398/1,995 4,542/2,060
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,475/2,030 –
> Sport automatic transmis-
sion with double clutch
lbs/kg – 4,608/2,090
Load lbs/kg 750/340 750/340
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,161/980
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,467/1,119 2,469/1,120
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg – –
Trunk capacity cu ft/liters 9.1-10.7/260-305 9.1-10.7/260-305
Notes
Fuel tank: US gal/liters approx. 14.0/53 Fuel recommendations:
page 221
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
260
Reference Short commands for the voice activation system
Short commands for the voice activation
system
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
General information
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
Having the possible spoken commands read
aloud: {Voice commands}
The following short commands are for vehicles
with the voice activation system. They do not
function with equipment packages that permit
only the mobile phone to be operated by voice.
Useful short commands
Function Command
Opening a music collection {Music collection}
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Opening the settings {Settings}
Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}
Opening the contacts {Contacts}
Displaying phone book {Phonebook}
Accessing services {Assist}
Accessing BMW Assist {B M W Assist}
Accessing ConnectedDrive {Connected Drive}
Opening the home address {Home address}
Opening destination entry {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance {Guidance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
261
Short commands for the voice activation system
Reference
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Music collection
External devices
Tone control
Function Command
Selecting a track {Track …} e.g. track 5
or
{C D track …} e.g. CD track 5
Playing back a CD {C D on}
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D … track …} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD {C D}
Displaying entertainment details on the split
screen
{Entertainment details}
Function Command
Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}
Calling up the current playback {Current playback}
Opening a music collection {Music collection}
Playing back a music collection {Music collection on}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}
Function Command
Opening external devices {External devices}
Accessing Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
AUX front {AUX}
Function Command
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
262
Reference Short commands for the voice activation system
Radio
FM
AM
Satellite radio
Presets
Function Command
Selecting a station directly {Station …} e.g. National Public Radio
Calling up the radio {Radio}
Calling up an FM station {F M}
Opening manual search {Manual}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Calling up a station {Select station}
Function Command
Calling up an AM station {A M}
Opening manual search {Manual}
Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2
Function Command
Opening the stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset …} e.g. stored station 2
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
263
Short commands for the voice activation system
Reference
Telephone
Office
Contacts
Function Command
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
Displaying phone book {Phonebook}
Redialing {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
Function Command
Opening Office menu {Office}
Displaying current Office {Current office}
Displaying contacts {Contacts}
Displaying messages {Messages}
Displaying calendar {Calendar}
Displaying tasks {Tasks}
Displaying reminders {Reminders}
Function Command
Selecting a name {Choose name}
Opening the contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
264
Reference Short commands for the voice activation system
Navigation
General information
Map
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Opening destination entry {Enter address}
Entering an address {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance {Guidance}
Starting destination guidance {Start guidance}
Ending destination guidance {Stop guidance}
Opening the home address {Home address}
Opening the route criteria {Route preference}
Opening the route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Map perspective view}
Automatic map scaling {Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Scale...meters {Map scale … meters} e.g. map scale of
100 meters
Scale...kilometers {Map scale … kilometers} e.g. split screen
scale of 5 kilometers
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
265
Short commands for the voice activation system
Reference
Split screen settings
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist
Function Command
Split screen {Switch on split screen}
Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}
Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}
Split screen, current position {Split screen current position}
Split screen, map facing north {Split screen map facing north}
Split screen, direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen, perspective {Split screen perspective}
Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}
Expanded intersection zoom on the split screen {Split screen Exit ramp view}
Split screen scale ... meters {Split screen scale … meters} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 meters
Split screen scale ... kilometers {Split screen scale … kilometers} e.g. split
screen scale of 5 kilometers
Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins {Split screen, Traffic conditions}
Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer {Split screen trip computer}
Function Command
Entering a new destination {Enter address}
Trip list {Stored trips}
Function Command
Accessing BMW Assist {B M W Assist}
Accessing ConnectedDrive {Connected Drive}
Accessing BMW Online {B M W Online}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
266
Reference Short commands for the voice activation system
Vehicle information
Settings
Vehicle
Equipment
Function Command
Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}
Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}
Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Opening the settings {Settings}
Opening the options {Options}
Settings on the Control Display {Control display}
Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}
Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}
Opening the speed limit settings {Speed}
Opening the light settings {Lighting}
Opening the door lock settings {Door locks}
Opening profiles {Profiles}
Function Command
Opening the air conditioning settings {Climate}
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
267
Short commands for the voice activation system
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
268
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 89
Acceleration assistant, refer to
Launch Control 70
Accessories, refer to Vehicle
equipment 5
Accident, reporting, refer to
Emergency Request 250
Activated-charcoal filter 109
Active steering 96
Adaptive Light Control 101
Additives
– coolant 235
– engine oil 235
Address, entering 134, 140
Address for navigation
– entering 134
Adjusting temperature 107
Airbags 97
– sitting safely 49
– warning lamp 98
Air conditioner 106
Air distribution
– automatic 107
Airing, refer to Ventilation 109
Air outlets, refer to Air
vents 106
Air pressure, checking, refer
to Tire inflation
pressure 223
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated air mode 108
Air vents 106
Air volume 108
AKI, refer to Fuel grade 221
Alarm system 38
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 40
– interior motion sensor 39
– switching off an alarm 39
– tilt alarm sensor 39
Albums in music
collection 175
ALL program 108
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 231
AM, waveband 157
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated air mode 108
Antifreeze
– coolant 235
– washer fluid 72
Antilock Brake System
ABS 89
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 38
Appointments, refer to
Calendar 207
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 259
Approved engine oils 235
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to
W
eights 259
Apps 216
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 115
Arrival time
– computer 78
Ashtray 116
Assistance systems, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 89
AUC Automatic recirculated
air control 108
Audible instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 145
Audio 154
– controls 154
– switching on/off 154
– tone control 155
– volume 155
Automatic
– air distribution 107
– air volume 107
– cruise control 73
– headlamp control 100
Automatic car washes 239
Automatic climate control 106
Automatic curb monitor 56
Automatic high beams and
low beams, refer to High-
beam Assistant 102
Automatic lamps
– refer to Welcome lamps 101
Automatic recirculated air
control AUC 108
Automatic Service
Request 215
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– selector lever lock 64
– shiftlock 64
– towing 252
– tow-starting 252
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 107
AUX-In connection 177
Available services 216
Average fuel consumption 77
– setting the units 80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
269
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Average speed 77
Avoid highways in
navigation 143
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 40
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 259
B
Backrests, refer to Seats 50
Backrest width adjustment 51
Back seats, refer to Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 52
Backup lamp, replacing
bulb 247
Bag for skis, refer to Ski
bag 118
Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 251
Bar, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 253
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 199
Bass, tone control 155
Battery 248
– charging 248
– disposal 42, 249
– jump starting 251
– replacing 248
– temporary power failure 248
Battery renewal
– remote control for vehicle 41
Being towed 253
Belts, refer to Safety belts 54
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 54
Beverage holders, refer to
Cupholders 116
Blower, refer to Air
volume 108
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 189
Bluetooth audio 180
– disconnecting an audio
connection 183
– pairing device 181
– playback 182
– unpairing device 183
– what to do if … 183
BMW Assist 212
– updating 216
BMW Info 206
BMW Maintenance
System 237
BMW Online 214
Bottle holders, refer to
Cupholders 116
Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control 89
Brake fluid
– service requirements 80
Brake Force Display 96
Brake lamps
– brake force display 96
– replacing bulb 247
Brake pads, breaking in 124
Brake pedal, refer to Braking
safely
126
Bra
k
e rotors 127
– brakes 124
– breaking in 124
Brakes
– ABS 89
– BMW Maintenance
System 237
– braking safely 126
– breaking in 124
– parking brake 63
– service requirements 80
Brake system 124
– BMW Maintenance
System 237
– breaking in 124
– disc brakes 127
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 251
Breaking in the clutch 124
Break-in period 124
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 243
Button for starting the
engine 61
Buttons on the steering
wheel 13
C
Calendar 207
– displaying appointment 207
– selecting calendar day 207
California Proposition 65
warning 6
Call
– accepting 193
– ending 193
– muting the microphone 195
– rejecting 193
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 194
Calls
– with multiple parties 194
Can holders, refer to
Cupholders 116
Capacities 259
Capacity of the trunk 259
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 248
Car care, refer to Care 239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
270
Reference Everything from A to Z
Care 239
– automatic car washes 239
– care products 240
– carpets 242
– chrome parts 241
– convertible top 242
– displays 242
– fine wood parts 241
– headlamps 240
– leather 240
– light-alloy wheels 241
– paintwork 240
– plastic parts 241
– rubber seals 241
– safety belts 241
– sensors and cameras 242
– upholstery and cloth
trim 241
Cargo, securing 128
Cargo area, refer to Trunk
Cargo area lid, refer to Trunk
lid 37
Cargo loading 127
– securing cargo 128
– stowing cargo 128
– vehicle 127
Car jack
– jacking points 248
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 32
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 115
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 188
Car radio, refer to Radio 157
Car wash 239
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 126
CD, audio playback 166
CD player 166
– controls 154
– fast forward/reverse 168
– random sequence 167
– selecting a track 166
– switching on/off 154
– tone control 155
– volume 155
Center armrest 115
Center brake lamp, replacing
bulb 247
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 16
Central key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 32
Central locking
– from inside 37
– from outside 33
Central lo
cking
system 33
– comfort access 40
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs 243
Changing gears 68
Changing the language on the
Control Display 87
Changing wheels 248
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 232
Check Control 84
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 59
Child restraint systems 58
Child seats 58
Chrome parts 241
Chrome polish 241
Cigarette lighter 117
Cleaning headlamps 72
– washer fluid 73
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 239
Climate control
– automatic air
distribution 107
Clock 75
– 12h/24h mode 83
– setting the time and date 83
– setting time 82
Closing
– from inside 37
– from outside 34
Clothes hooks 116
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 62
Comfort Access 40
– replacing the battery 41
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 16
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 61
Compass 113
Computer 77
– displays on Control
Display 78
Computer, refer to iDrive 20
Concierge service 213
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 127
Condition Based Service
CBS 237
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 32
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the
vehicle 35
ConnectedDrive
212
Con
n
ecting a music player,
AUX-In connection 177
Connecting a music player,
USB audio interface 178
Connecting an iPod, refer to
AUX-In connection 177
Connecting an iPod, refer to
USB audio interface 178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
271
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Connecting an MP3 player,
refer to AUX-In
connection 177
Connecting an MP3 player,
refer to USB audio
interface 178
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 117
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 77
Contacts 202
– deleting 204, 211
– exporting/importing 211
– new contact 203
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 20
Control Display 20, 21
Control Display, refer to iDrive
– switching on/off 21
Controller, refer to iDrive 20
Controls and displays 12
Convenient opening and
closing
– windows 34
– windows with Comfort
Access 40
– with Comfort Access 40
Convenient start, refer to
Starting the engine 62
Convertible
– rollover protection
system 99
– top 44
– wind deflector 47
Convertible top
– convenient opening 34
Convertible top care 242
Coolant 235
– checking level 236
– filling 236
Coolant temperature 236
Cooling, maximum 107
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 235
Corner-illuminating
lamps 102
Cornering light, refer to
Adaptive Light Control 101
Courtesy lamps 104
Criteria for route 143
Cross-hairs in navigation 139
Cruise control 73
Cruising range 77
Cupholders 116
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 259
Current fuel consumption
77
Cu
rrent playback
– e
xternal devices 180
– in music collection 174
Customer Relations 215
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 104
Data, technical
– capacities 259
– dimensions 258
– weights 259
Data memory 7
Data transfer 216
Date
– setting 84
– setting format 84
Daytime running lights, switch
positions 101
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 89
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 97
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 34
Defect
– door lock 36
– fuel filler flap 221
Defining a home address 203
Defogging windows 109
Defrosting windows 109
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 109
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 109
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 109
Destination, entering by town/
city name 134
Destination address
– entering 134, 140
Destination entry via BMW
Assist 139
Destination for navigation
– entering by voice 140
– entering via map 139
– entry 134
– home address 137
– manual entry 134
Destination guidance 143
– bypassing a route
section 144
– changing specified
route 143
– continuing 143
– starting 143
– voice instructions 145
– volume of voice
instructions 145
Differential, breaking in 124
Digital clock 75, 82
Digital compass 113
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio
159
Dime
nsion
s 258
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 71
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
272
Reference Everything from A to Z
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 136
Display, refer to Control
Display 20
Displaying contact
pictures 203
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 104
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 14
Displays and controls 12
Disposal
– of coolant 235
– remote control battery 42
– vehicle battery 249
Distance, refer to
Computer 78
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 80
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 78
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 88
Door key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 32
Door lock 36
Door lock, confirmation
signals 35
Doors, manual operation 36
DOT Quality Grades 228
Draft-free ventilation 109
Drinks holders, refer to
Cupholders 116
Drive mode 68
Drive-off assistance, refer to
DSC 89
Drive-off assistant 90
Driving dynamics control 69
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 100
Driving notes 124
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 90
Driving stability control
systems 89
Driving through water 126
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 124
Dry air, refer to Air
conditioning 109
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 89
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 90
– indicator lamps 90
DVD
– country codes 168
– settings 169
– video playback 168
DVD menu 169
DVD player, refer to CD
player 166
DVD video 168
D
y
namic Brake Control
DBC 89
Dynamic destination
guidance 149
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 89
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 90
– indicator lamps 90
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 89
Eject button, see buttons on
the CD/DVD player 154
Electrical defect
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 69
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 36
– fuel filler flap 221
Electronic brake-force
distribution EBV 89
Electronic oil level check 233
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 89
E-mail 206
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 36
– fuel filler flap 221
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 66
Emergency release, trunk
lid 38
Emergency Request 250
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 251
Energy, saving
– saving fuel 124
Engine
– breaking in 124
– starting 62
– starting, Comfort Access 40
– switching off 63
Engine compartment 232
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 235
Engine oil
– adding 235
– additives 235
– alternative oil types 235
– approved engine oils 235
– BMW Maintenance
System 237
– checking level 233
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 80
Engine oil level, checking 233
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 62
Entering the postal code for
navigation 135
Entry map for destination 139
Equalizer, tone control 155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
273
Everything from A to Z
Reference
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 89
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 126
Exterior mirrors 55
– adjusting 55
– automatic dimming
feature 56
– automatic heating 56
– folding in and out 55
External devices 177
– random sequence 180
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 252
– for tying down loads 128
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 84
Failure of an electrical
consumer 249
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 40
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 54
Fastest route for
navigation 143
Fast forward
– CD player 168
Filter of automatic climate
control, refer to Microfilter/
activated charcoal filter 109
First aid pouch 251
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 61
Flash when locking/
unlocking 35
Flat tire
– run-flat tires 231
– tire pressure monitor
TPM 92
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 91
– indicating a flat tire 92
– initializing the system 91
– system limits 91
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 229
FM, waveband 157
Fog lamps 103
– indicator lamp 15, 104
Footwell lamps 104
For your own safety 5
Free memory capacity, music
collection 176
Front airbags 97
Front seat adjustment 50
Frost on windows, refer to
Defrosting windows 109
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 91
Fuel 221
– gauge 76
– high-quality brands 221
– quality 221
– specifications 221
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 259
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Fuel consumption indicator,
refer to Average fuel
consumption 77
Fuel consumption statistics,
refer to Average fuel
consumption 77
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Fuel filler flap 220
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction
221
Fuses 249
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 111
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 221
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Gas station
recommendations 145
Gear indicator, automatic
transmission 64
Gear shifting
– automatic transmission 64
– manual transmission 64
Gearshift lever 67
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– manual transmission 64
General driving notes 125
Glass roof, electric 43
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 40
– opening, closing 43
– pinch protection system 44
– remote control 34
– tilting 43
Glove compartment 115
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 132
Grills, refer to Air vents 106
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 259
H
Halogen lamps
– replacing bulbs 244
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 63
Hands-free system 197
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone for hands-free
mode 16
Hazard warning flashers 16
HD Radio 159
Head airbags 97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
274
Reference Everything from A to Z
Headlamp control,
automatic 100
Headlamp cover 244
Headlamp flasher 71
– indicator lamp 15
Headlamps
– replacing bulbs 244
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 101
Head restraints 52
Heated
– seats 54
– steering wheel 57
Heated mirrors 56
Heating
– mirrors 56
– seats 54
– steering wheel 57
Heating, rear window 109
Heating and ventilation 106
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 128
Height, refer to
Dimensions 258
Height adjustment
– steering wheel 57
High-beam Assistant 102
High beams 102
– indicator lamp 15
– replacing bulbs 244
High beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to High-
beam Assistant 102
High-pressure washer 239
High water, refer to Driving
through water 126
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 143
Hills 127
Holders for cups 116
Hood 232
Hot exhaust system 126
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control 89
Hydroplaning 126
I
IBOC, refer to HD radio 159
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 75
Identification marks
– tire coding 228
iDrive 20
– adjusting brightness 87
– changing date and time 83
– changing language 87
– menu guidance 21
– operating principle 20
– status information 23
Ignition 62
– switched off 62
– switched on 62
Ignition key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control 32
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 61
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 62
Ignition lock 61
Incoming call 193
Indicator and warning
lamps 15
– tire pressure monitor
TPM 94
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 32
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 92
Initializing
– compass, refer to
Calibrating 114
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 158
– refer to Setting the time and
date 83
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 91
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 145
Instrument cluster 14
Instrument combination, refer
to Instrument cluster 14
Instrument lighting 104
Integrated key 32
Integrated universal remote
control 111
Interactive map 139
Interior lamps 104
– remote control 35
Interior motion sensor 39
Interior rearview mirror 56
– automatic dimming
feature 56
– compass 113
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 72
Intersection, entering,
navigation 13
5
J
Jacking points 248
Jets, refer to Air vents 106
Jets, refer to Window washer
nozzles 72
Joystick, refer to iDrive 20
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 251
Jump starting 251
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 32
Keyless go, refer to Comfort
Access 40
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 40
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
275
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Keypad dialing 195
Kickdown 65
Knock control 221
L
Lamps
– adaptive light control 101
– interior lighting 104
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
Low beams 100
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 243
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 128
Last destinations 137
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 59
Launch Control 70
Leather care 240
LED Light-emitting
diodes 243
Length, refer to
Dimensions 258
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 247
Light
– instrument lighting 104
– refer to High-beam
Assistant 102
Light-alloy wheels 241
Light control
– refer to High-beam
Assistant 102
Light-emitting diodes
LED 243
Lighter 117
– socket 117
Lighting
– lamps and bulbs 243
– of the instruments 104
– of vehicle, refer to
Lamps 100
Light switch 100
Limit, refer to Speed limit 86
Load 127
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 128
Lock buttons of doors, refer to
Locking 37
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 35
– from inside 37
– from outside 34
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 40
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 37
– from outside 34
Low beam control, refer to
High-beam Assistant 102
Low-beam headlamps 100
– automatic 100
– replacing bulbs 244
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 51
Luggage compartment
– lid, refer to Trunk lid 37
Luggage compartment, refer
to Trunk
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 129
Lu
mbar su
pport 51
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 231
Maintenance, refer to
– BMW Maintenance
System 237
– Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models or in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Maintenance system 237
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 84
Managing music 175
Manually unlocking parking
lock 69
Manual operation
– door lock 36
– fuel filler flap 221
– parking lock 69
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 66
Manual operation with
automatic transmission 65
Manual transmission 64
Map for navigation
– changing scale 146
– entering destination 139
Map view 145
Maximum cooling 107
Maximum speed
– for winter tires 231
Menus, refer to iDrive 20
Messages 204
Messages from the Concierge
service 205
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter for automatic climate
control 109
Microphone for telephone 16
Mirror dimming feature 56
Mirrors 55
– automatic curb monitor 56
– exterior mirrors 55
– heating 56
– interior rearview mirror 56
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 193
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 189
– operation 193
– pairing 189
– suitable mobile phones 188
– unpairing 191
– what to do if…. 192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
276
Reference Everything from A to Z
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 115
Mobile phone, refer to
Telephone 188
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive 20
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 91
Multi-channel playback 156
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 13
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 71
– refer to Wiper system 71
Music collection 172
– backing up 176
– deleting 176
– random sequence 175
– restoring 176
Music interface for
smartphones 178
Music search 174
My Info 205
N
Navigation
– starting destination
guidance after entering a
destination 136
– storing current position 136
– voice activation 140
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 145
Navigation data 132
Navigation system 132
– address book 136
– bypassing a route
section 144
– continuing destination
guidance 143
– destination entry 134
– dynamic destination
guidance 149
– entering a destination by
voice 140
– entering a destination
manually 134
– frequently asked
questions 151
– gas station
recommendations 145
– planning a trip 141
– route list 144
– selecting destination via
map 139
– selecting route criteria 143
– special destinations 137
– starting destination
guidance 143
– terminating destination
guidance 143
– traffic bulletins 147
– voice instructions 145
– volume adjustment 145
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 52
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 116
Neutral 67
New tires 230
Next Service indicator, refer to
Condition Based Service
CBS 237
North-facing map 145
Notes 208
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for Onboard Diagnosis 238
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 221
Odometer 75
Office 201
– current office 201
– what to do if…. 209
Oil, refer to Engine oil 233
Oil consumption 233
Oil level 233
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 249
Onboard vehicle tool kit 243
Opening and closing
– comfort access 40
– from inside 37
– from outside 34
– using the door lock 36
– using the remote control 34
Options, selecting for
navigation 143
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 21
Outlets, refer to
Ventilation 109
Outside temperature
display 75
– changing unit of measure 80
– in computer 80
Outside temperature
warning 75
Overriding selector lever
lock 66
Overview
– radio operation 154
P
Paintwork care 240
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
277
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Park Distance Control PDC 88
Parked car ventilation 110
– preselecting switch-on
times 110
– switching on and off
directly 110
Parking
– vehicle 63
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 88
Parking brake 63
– indicator lamp 63
Parking lamps/low beams 100
– replacing bulbs 245
Parts and accessories, refer to
Vehicle equipment 5
Passenger side mirror tilt
function 56
Pathway lighting 101
Personal information, refer to
Office 201
Personal Profile 32
Phone numbers
– dialing 194
Phone reception level, refer to
Status information 23
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 44
– windows 43
Playing music 174
Polish 241
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 109
Power windows 42
Power windows, refer to
Windows 42
Pressure, tires 223
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 91
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 92
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 13
Programmable memory
keys 25
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 44
– windows 43
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First aid pouch 251
Puncture
– flat tire monitor 91
R
Radio
– controls 154
– HD radio 159
– satellite radio 161
– selecting waveband 157
– storing stations 158
– switching on/off 154
– tone control 155
– volume 155
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 61
Radio readiness 61
– switched off 62
– switched on 61
Rain sensor 72
Random sequence
– CD player 167
– external devices 180
– music collection 175
Reading aloud 209
Reading lamps 105
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 246
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 52
– folding down backrests 117
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 55
Rear window defroster 109
Reception
– quality 158
– radio station 158
Recirculated air mode 108
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated air mode 108
Redialing 196
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 246
Refueling 220
Releasing
– hood 233
Remaining distance, refer to
Computer 78
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 77
Reminders 208
Remote control 32
– battery renewal 41
– comfort access 40
– garage door opener 111
– malfunctions 35, 41
– removing from the ignition
lock 61
– service data 237
– trunk lid 35
Remote control key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control 32
Re
plac
ement fuses, refer to
Fuses 249
Replacement remote
control 32
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 243
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 230
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Reservoir for washer
systems 73
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 156
Restraint systems, refer to
Safety belts 54
Restraint systems for
children 58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
278
Reference Everything from A to Z
Retreaded tires 230
Reverse
– CD player 168
Reverse gear 67
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 65
– manual transmission 64
Road map 145
Roadside
Assistance 213, 251
Roadside parking lamps 102
– replacing bulbs 245
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 80
Rollover protection system,
Convertible 99
– resetting 99
Roof load capacity 259
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 129
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 254
Rotary/pushbutton control,
refer to Controller 20
Route 143, 144
– bypassing sections 144
– changing 143, 144
– changing criteria 143
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 144
– map view 145
– selecting 143
Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions 145
Route map, refer to Map
view 145
Route section, changing 144
Route selection 143
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to
Run-flat tires 231
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 231
Run-flat tires 231
– flat tire 92
– inflation pressure 223
– new tires 230
– remaining driving distance,
refer to Indication of a flat
tire 92
– tire replacement 230
– winter tires 231
Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat
tires 231
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 55
Safety belts 54
– damage 55
– indicator lamp 55
– reminder 55
– sitting safely 49
Safety systems
– airbags 97
– antilock brake system
ABS 89
– dynamic stability control
DSC 89
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 99
– safety belts 54
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 231
Satellite radio 161
– activating or deactivating
channels 161
– favorites 163
– selecting channels 162
– storing channels 162
– time shift 163
– traffic jump 165
Saving fuel 124
Screen, refer to iDrive 20
Screw thread for tow
fitting 253
SDARS, refer to satellite
radio 161
Seat and mirror memory 54
Seat belt reminder, refer to
"Fasten safety belts"
reminder 55
Seats 50
– heating 54
– sitting safely 49
Securing cargo 119, 120
Selecting a station
– radio 157
Selecting new scale for
navigation 146
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
Selector lever positions 67
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 251
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 251
Service data in remote
control 237
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 237
Service Request 215
Service requirements 80
Service status
216
Settings
–
clock,
12h/24h format 83
– date format 84
– DVD 169
– language 87
Settings for the map view 146
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times 110
Setting tone during audio
operation, refer to Tone
control 155
Shifting 68
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
279
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Shifting gears with automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Shift into a drive position, refer
to selector lever
positions 67
Shiftlock, refer to Changing
selector lever positions 64
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 68
Short commands for the voice
activation system 260
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 143
Side airbags 97
Side windows, refer to
Windows 42
Signal horn, refer to Horn 12
Sitting safely 49
– airbags 49
– safety belts 49
Ski bag 118
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 43
Slot for remote control 61
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 116, 117
Snap-in adapter 188
– inserting/removing 199
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest 115
Snow chains 231
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 117
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
OBD 238
Software update 184
Spare fuses 249
Special destinations 137
Special destinations,
displaying 139
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 235
Specified engine oils, refer to
Approved engine oils 235
Speed
– for winter tires 231
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 86
Speedo, refer to
Speedometer 14
Speedometer 14
Speed Volume 156
Split screen content, refer to
Selecting the display for the
split screen content 24
Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch 66
– driving dynamics control 69
– kickdown 68
– launch control 70
– manually unlocking parking
lock 69
– n
eu
tral 67
– reverse gear 67
Sport program, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Sport program with 7-gear
Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 68
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 89
Start/Stop button 61
– starting the engine 62
– switching off the engine 63
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 62
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 251
Starting the engine
– start/stop button 61
Start menu 21
State/province, for
navigation 134
Status information on the
Control Display 23
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 239
Steering wheel 57
– adjustment 57
– buttons on steering
wheel 13
– heating 57
– shift paddles 68
Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 68
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 96
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
Storage 242
Storage compartment
package 116
Storage compartments 116
Stored trip, calling up 142
Storing
– seat position, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 54
Storing a destination in the
address book 136
Storing music 172
Storing tires 231
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 116
Street, entering,
navigation 135
Suitable mobile phones 188
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 223
Surround 156
SVCD
168
SW
, wav
eband 157
Switches, refer to Cockpit 12
Switching off
– engine 63
Switching off the engine
– start/stop button 61
Switching on
– audio 154
– CD player 154
– radio 154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
280
Reference Everything from A to Z
Switching the air conditioning
on and off 109
Switching the entertainment
audio output on/off 154
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 110
Symbols 4
– status information 23
T
Tachometer 76
Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 37
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 246
– replacing bulb 247
Tail lamps 246
– replacing bulb 247
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 259
Tasks 207
Technical data 258
– dimensions 258
Technical modifications 5
Telephone 188
– hands-free system 197
– phone book 195
– received calls 196
– redialing 196
– voice commands 197
Telephone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 115
TeleService 213
Teleservice Diagnosis 214
Temperature display
– outside temperature 75
– outside temperature
warning 75
– setting the units 80
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 73
Text message 205
Thigh support 50
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 247
Three-point safety belt 54
Through-loading system 117
Tilt alarm sensor 39
Tilt function, passenger side
mirror 56
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 110
Tire inflation pressure 223
– loss 92, 93
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 91
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 92
– resetting the system 93
– system limitations 93
– warning lamp 94
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 92
Tire Quality Grading 228
Tires
– age 228, 230
– air loss 94
– bre
a
king in 124
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 248
– condition 229
– damage 229
– inflation pressure 223
– labels 228
– minimum tread depth 229
– new tires 230
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 91
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 92
– puncture 92
– retreaded 230
– run-flat tires 231
– size 228
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 229
– winter tires 231
TMC station, refer to Traffic
bulletins 147
Tone
– control 155
– middle setting 156
Tools, refer to Onboard
vehicle tool kit 243
Top 50 in music
collection 175
Tow bar 253
Tow fitting 252
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 252
Towing 252
– car with automatic
transmission 252
– methods 253
– with 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 253
Towing and tow-starting 252
Town/city, for navigation 134
Tow rope 254
Tow-starting 252
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 92
Track
– selecting on CD 166
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 89
Traffic bulletins
– categories 149
Traffic bulletins, filtering 149
Traffic bulletins for
navigation 147
– during destination
guidance 149
Traffic bulletins in navigation
– screen display in the map
view 148
Traf
fic co
ngestion
– displaying traffic
bulletins 147
– refer to Route, bypassing
segments 144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
281
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Transmission
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 66
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– idle position 67
– launch control 70
– manually unlocking parking
lock 69
– manual transmission 64
– reverse gear 67
Transporting children
safely 58
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 128
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 229
Trip, deleting 142
Trip, storing 142
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 75
Triple turn signal activation 71
Trip odometer 75
Trips, changing 142
Trunk
– capacity 259
– comfort access 41
– enlarging, refer to Through-
loading system 117
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 104
– opening from outside 38
Trunk lid 37
– comfort access 41
– emergency release 38
– opening from outside 38
– unlocking with remote
control 35
Trunk net, refer to Securing
cargo 128
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 258
Turn signal 71
– indicator lamp 14
Turn signals
– replacing bulbs 246
– triple turn signal 71
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 128
U
Underbody protection, refer to
Caring for your vehicle 239
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 228
Units
– average fuel
consumption 80
Units of measure
– temperature 80
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 111
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 34
Unlocking
– from inside 37
– from outside 34
– trunk lid 41
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 40
Unlocking without a key, refer
to Comfort Access 40
Updating software 184
Updating the navigation
data 132
USB audio interface 178
USB interface 115
Using contact data 208
V
VCD 168
Vehicle
– battery 248
– breaking in 124
– cargo loading 127
– decommissioning, refer to
Vehicle storage 242
– dimensions 258
– identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 232
– parking 63
– weight 259
Vehicle equipment 5
Vehicle jack 248
Vehicle storage 242
Ventilation 109
– draft-free 109
Ventilation when parked, refer
to Parked car ventilation 110
Vents, refer to Ventilation 109
Video menu 168
Video playback 168, 180
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice
instructions 145
Voice commands
– overview 27
– short commands 260
– telephone 197
Voice instructions from
navigation system 145
– repeating 145
– switching on/off 145
– volume 145
Voice phone book 198
Volume 154
– audio sources 154
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 259
– mobile phone 193
– voice instructions 145
Volume compensation, tone
control 156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
282
Reference Everything from A to Z
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 15
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 84
Warning triangle 251
Washer fluid 72
Washer fluid filler neck 73
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 116
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 126
Water penetration 239
Waveband on radio 157
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 229
Weights 259
Welcome lamps 101
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 258
Wheels, new 230
Wheels and tires 223
Width, refer to
Dimensions 258
Wind deflector 47
Windows 42
– convenient opening and
closing 34
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 40
– opening, closing 42
– pinch protection system 43
Window washer system 71
Windshield
– cleaning 72
– defrosting and removing
condensation 109
Windshield wash
– filling capacity, reservoir 259
Windshield washer reservoir,
refer to Washer fluid filler
neck 73
Windshield washer system
– spray nozzles 72
– washer fluid 73
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 243
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 71
Winter tires 231
– setting speed limit 86
– storage 231
Wiper blade replacement 243
Wiper system 71
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 243
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
01 40 2 911 223 ue iDrive
*BL291122300I*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - © 06/13 BMW AG
